DSP1629T10K19.2IR [ETC]

DSP|16-BIT|CMOS|QFP|100PIN|PLASTIC ;
DSP1629T10K19.2IR
型号: DSP1629T10K19.2IR
厂家: ETC    ETC
描述:

DSP|16-BIT|CMOS|QFP|100PIN|PLASTIC

文件: 总126页 (文件大小:1786K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Supported by DSP1629 software and hardware  
development tools.  
1 Features  
Optimized for mobile communications applications  
with a bit manipulation unit for higher coding effi-  
ciency.  
2 Description  
On-chip, programmable, PLL clock synthesizer.  
The DSP1629 is Agere Systems Inc.’s first digital signal  
processor offering 100 MIPS operation at 3.0 V and  
80 MIPS operation at 2.7 V with a reduction in power  
consumption. Designed specifically for applications re-  
quiring low power dissipation in mobile communica-  
tions systems, the DSP1629 is a signal-coding device  
that can be programmed to perform a wide variety of  
fixed-point signal processing functions. The device is  
based on the DSP1600 core with a bit manipulation unit  
for enhanced signal coding efficiency. The DSP1629 in-  
cludes a mix of peripherals specifically intended to sup-  
port processing-intensive but cost-sensitive  
10 ns and 16.7 ns instruction cycle times at 3.0 V,  
and 19.2 ns and 12.5 ns instruction cycle times at  
2.7 V.  
Mask-programmable memory map option: the  
DSP1629x16 features 16 Kwords on-chip dual-port  
RAM. The DSP1629x10 features 10 Kwords on-  
chip dual-port RAM. Both feature 48 Kwords on-  
chip ROM with a secure option.  
Low power consumption:  
— <1.9 mW/MIPS typical at 2.7 V.  
Flexible power management modes:  
applications in the area of digital wireless communica-  
tions.  
— Standard sleep: 0.2 mW/MIPS at 2.7 V.  
— Sleep with slow internal clock: 0.7 mW at 2.7 V.  
— Hardware STOP (pin halts DSP): <20 µA.  
The DSP1629x16 contains 16 Kwords of internal dual-  
port RAM (DPRAM), which allows simultaneous access  
to two RAM locations in a single instruction cycle. The  
DSP1629x10 supports the use of 10 Kwords of  
DPRAM. Both devices contain 48 Kwords of internal  
ROM (IROM).  
Mask-programmable clock options: small signal  
and CMOS.  
100-TQFP package, providing excellent second-  
level reliability.  
Sequenced accesses to X and Y external memory.  
Object code and pin compatible with the DSP1627.  
Single-cycle squaring.  
The DSP1629 is object code compatible with the  
DSP1627 while providing more memory. The DSP1629  
is pin compatible with the DSP1627. Note that TRST  
(JTAG test reset) replaces a VDD pin.  
16 x 16-bit multiplication and 36-bit accumulation in  
one instruction cycle.  
The DSP1629 supports 2.7 V and 3.0 V operation and  
features flexible power management modes. Several  
control mechanisms achieve low-power operation, in-  
cluding a STOP pin for placing the DSP into a fully stat-  
ic, halted state, and a programmable power control  
register used to power down unused on-chip I/O units.  
These power management modes allow for trade-offs  
between power reduction and wake-up latency require-  
ments. During system standby, power consumption is  
reduced to less than 20 µA.  
Instruction cache for high-speed, program-efficient,  
zero-overhead looping.  
Dual 25 Mbits/s serial I/O ports with multiprocessor  
capability:  
— 16-bit data channel, 8-bit protocol channel.  
8-bit parallel host interface:  
— Supports 8-bit or 16-bit transfers.  
Motorola® or Intel® compatible.  
The on-chip clock synthesizer can be driven by an ex-  
ternal clock whose frequency is a fraction of the instruc-  
tion rate.  
8-bit control I/O interface.  
256 memory-mapped I/O ports.  
The device is packaged in a 144-pin PBGA, a 100-pin  
BQFP, or a 100-pin TQFP, and is available with 10 ns  
and 16.7 ns instruction cycle times at 3.0 V, and 19.2 ns  
and 12.5 ns instruction cycle times at 2.7 V.  
IEEE ® P1149.1 test port (JTAG boundary scan).  
Full-speed in-circuit emulation hardware develop-  
ment system on-chip.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Table of Contents  
Page Contents  
Contents  
Page  
1
2
3
4
Features.............................................................. 1  
10.1 DSP Clock Generation  
Description.......................................................... 1  
Pin Information.................................................... 3  
Hardware Architecture ........................................ 8  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 77  
10.2 Reset Circuit (3.0 V Operation)............... 78  
10.3 Reset Synchronization (3.0 V Operation) 79  
10.4 JTAG I/O Specifications  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 80  
10.5 Interrupt (3.0 V Operation)...................... 81  
10.6 Bit Input/Output (BIO)  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 82  
10.7 External Memory Interface  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 83  
10.8 PHIF Specifications (3.0 V Operation).... 87  
10.9 Serial I/O Specifications  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.9  
DSP1629 Architectural Overview ............. 8  
DSP1600 Core Architectural Overview .. 11  
Interrupts and Trap................................. 12  
Memory Maps and Wait-States .............. 17  
External Memory Interface (EMI)............ 20  
Bit Manipulation Unit (BMU) ................... 21  
Serial I/O Units (SIOs)............................ 21  
Parallel Host Interface (PHIF)................. 23  
Bit Input/Output Unit (BIO)...................... 24  
4.10 Timer ...................................................... 25  
4.11 JTAG Test Port....................................... 25  
4.12 Clock Synthesis...................................... 27  
4.13 Power Management ............................... 30  
Software Architecture ....................................... 37  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 93  
10.10 Multiprocessor Communication  
(3.0 V Operation) .................................... 98  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation ....... 99  
11.1 DSP Clock Generation  
5
6
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
Instruction Set......................................... 37  
Register Settings .................................... 46  
Instruction Set Formats .......................... 56  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 100  
11.2 Reset Circuit (2.7 V Operation)............. 101  
11.3 Reset Synchronization  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 102  
11.4 JTAG I/O Specifications  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 103  
11.5 Interrupt (2.7 V Operation).................... 104  
11.6 Bit Input/Output (BIO)  
Signal Descriptions ........................................... 62  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
System Interface..................................... 62  
External Memory Interface ..................... 64  
Serial Interface #1 .................................. 65  
Parallel Host Interface or Serial  
Interface #2 and Control I/O Interface .... 66  
Control I/O Interface ............................... 66  
JTAG Test Interface ............................... 67  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 105  
11.7 External Memory Interface  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 106  
11.8 PHIF Specifications (2.7 V Operation).. 110  
11.9 Serial I/O Specifications  
6.5  
6.6  
7
8
Mask-Programmable Options ........................... 68  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
Input Clock Options ................................ 68  
Memory Map Options ............................. 68  
ROM Security Options............................ 68  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 116  
11.10 Multiprocessor Communication  
Device Characteristics...................................... 69  
(2.7 V Operation) .................................. 121  
12 Outline Diagrams ............................................ 122  
12.1 100-Pin BQFP (Bumpered Quad  
Flat Pack).............................................. 122  
12.2 100-Pin TQFP (Thin Quad Flat Pack)... 123  
12.3 144-Pin PBGA (Plastic Ball Grid Array) 124  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
Absolute Maximum Ratings.................... 69  
Handling Precautions ............................. 69  
Recommended Operating Conditions .... 69  
Package Thermal Considerations .......... 70  
9
Electrical Characteristics and Requirements .... 71  
9.1 Power Dissipation................................... 74  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation....... 76  
2
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
3 Pin Information  
VSS  
14  
DD  
V
88  
87  
SADD1  
DB4  
DB3  
DB2  
DB1  
DB0  
IO  
15  
16  
17  
DOEN1  
86  
85  
PIN #1  
IDENTIFIER  
ZONE  
OCK2/PCSN  
DO2/PSTAT  
SYNC2/PBSEL  
ILD2/PIDS  
OLD2/PODS  
IBF2/PIBF  
OBE2/POBE  
ICK2/PB0  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
84  
83  
82  
81  
80  
79  
78  
77  
ERAMHI  
V
DD  
ERAMLO  
EROM  
24  
25  
26  
27  
DI2/PB1  
RWN  
VSS  
VSS  
76  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
DSP1629  
DOEN2/PB2  
SADD2/PB3  
TRST  
EXM  
AB15  
AB14  
28  
29  
30  
V
DD  
IOBIT0/PB4  
IOBIT1/PB5  
IOBIT2/PB6  
IOBIT3/PB7  
VEC3/IOBIT4  
VEC2/IOBIT5  
VEC1/IOBIT6  
VEC0/IOBIT7  
VSS  
31  
32  
AB13  
AB12  
AB11  
AB10  
AB9  
33  
34  
35  
68  
67  
66  
AB8  
36  
37  
AB7  
65  
64  
VSS  
38  
5-4218 (F).c  
Figure 1. DSP1629 BQFP Pin Diagram  
Agere Systems Inc.  
3
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
3 Pin Information (continued)  
1
VSS  
DB4  
VDD  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
2
SADD1  
3
DB3  
DOEN1  
4
DB2  
OCK2/PCSN  
DO2/PSTAT  
SYNC2/PBSEL  
ILD2/PIDS  
OLD2/PODS  
IBF2/PIBF  
OBE2/POBE  
ICK2/PB0  
DI2/PB1  
5
DB1  
6
DB0  
7
IO  
8
ERAMHI  
VDD  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
ERAMLO  
EROM  
RWN  
VSS  
VSS  
DSP1629  
EXM  
AB15  
AB14  
VDD  
DOEN2/PB2  
SADD2/PB3  
TRST  
IOBIT0/PB4  
IOBIT1/PB5  
IOBIT2/PB6  
IOBIT3/PB7  
VEC3/IOBIT4  
VEC2/IOBIT5  
VEC1/IOBIT6  
VEC0/IOBIT7  
VSS  
AB13  
AB12  
AB11  
AB10  
AB9  
AB8  
AB7  
VSS  
5-4219 (F).c  
Figure 2. DSP1629 TQFP Pin Diagram  
4
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
3 Pin Information (continued)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
VSS  
VDD  
VDDA  
VSSA  
SPARE PACKAGE BALLS  
SHOULD BE TIED TO  
SOFT GND OR SIG GND  
5-5224 (C)  
Note: Solder balls viewed through package.  
Figure 3. 144-Pin Plastic Ball Grid Array (Top View)  
Agere Systems Inc.  
5
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
3 Pin Information (continued)  
Functional descriptions of pins 1—100 are found in Section 6, Signal Descriptions. The functionality of CKI and CKI2  
pins are mask-programmable (see Section 7, Mask-Programmable Options). Input levels on all I and I/O type pins  
are designed to remain at full CMOS levels when not driven by the DSP.  
Table 1. Pin Descriptions  
PBGA Pin  
BQFP Pin  
TQFP Pin  
Symbol  
Type  
Name/Function  
B6, A6, B5, A5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 88, 89, 90, 91,  
B4, A4, B3, A3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 92, 94, 95, 96,  
B2, A2, A1, B1, 12, 15, 16, 17, 97, 98, 99, 2,  
DB[15:0]  
I/O* External Memory Data Bus 15—0.  
C2, C1, C3, D1  
18, 19  
20  
21  
3, 4, 5, 6  
D2  
E1  
7
8
IO  
ERAMHI  
OData Address 0x4000 to 0x40FF I/O Enable.  
O†  
Data Address 0x8000 to 0xFFFF External RAM  
Enable.  
O†  
E2  
23  
10  
ERAMLO  
Data Address 0x4100 to 0x7FFF External RAM  
Enable.  
O†  
O†  
I
F1  
F2  
G1  
24  
25  
27  
11  
12  
14  
EROM  
RWN  
Program Address External ROM Enable.  
Read/Write Not.  
EXM  
External ROM Enable.  
G2, H1, H2, J1, 28, 29, 31, 32, 15, 16, 18, 19,  
J2, K1, K2, L1, 33, 34, 35, 36, 20, 21, 22, 23,  
L2, M1, K3, M2, 37, 40, 41, 42, 24, 27, 28, 29,  
L3, M3, L4, M4 43, 44, 45, 46 30, 31, 32, 33  
AB[15:0]  
O* External Memory Address Bus 15—0.  
L5  
M5  
L6  
M6  
L7  
47  
48  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
56  
57  
58  
59  
34  
35  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
43  
44  
45  
46  
INT1  
INT0  
IACK  
STOP  
TRAP  
RSTB  
CKO  
TCK  
I
I
Vectored Interrupt 1.  
Vectored Interrupt 0.  
O* Interrupt Acknowledge.  
STOP Input Clock.  
I/O* Nonmaskable Program Trap/Breakpoint Indication.  
I
M7  
L8  
I
O†  
I
I‡  
O§  
I‡  
Reset Bar.  
Processor Clock Output.  
JTAG Test Clock.  
JTAG Test Mode Select.  
JTAG Test Data Output.  
JTAG Test Data Input.  
Mask-Programmable Input Clock Option  
M8  
L9  
TMS  
TDO  
TDI  
M9  
L10  
CMOS  
CKI  
VSSA  
Small Signal  
VAC  
L11  
M11  
K10  
L12  
K11  
K12  
J11  
61  
62  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
48  
49  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
CKI**  
CKI2**  
I
I
VCM  
VEC0/IOBIT7 I/O* Vectored Interrupt Indication 0/Status/Control Bit 7.  
VEC1/IOBIT6 I/O* Vectored Interrupt Indication 1/Status/Control Bit 6.  
VEC2/IOBIT5 I/O* Vectored Interrupt Indication 2/Status/Control Bit 5.  
VEC3/IOBIT4 I/O* Vectored Interrupt Indication 3/Status/Control Bit 4.  
IOBIT3/PB7 I/O* Status/Control Bit 3/PHIF Data Bus Bit 7.  
IOBIT2/PB6 I/O* Status/Control Bit 2/PHIF Data Bus Bit 6.  
IOBIT1/PB5 I/O* Status/Control Bit 1/PHIF Data Bus Bit 5.  
IOBIT0/PB4 I/O* Status/Control Bit 0/PHIF Data Bus Bit 4.  
J12  
H11  
H12  
G11  
I‡  
TRST  
JTAG Test Reset.  
*
3-states when RSTB = 0, or by JTAG control.  
§
3-states when RSTB = 0 and INT0 = 1. Output = 1 when RSTB = 0 and INT0 = 0, except CKO, which is free-running.  
Pull-up devices on input.  
3-states by JTAG control.  
** See Section 7, Mask-Programmable Options.  
†† For SIO multiprocessor applications, add 5 kexternal pull-up resistors to SADD1 and/or SADD2 for proper initialization.  
6
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
3 Pin Information (continued)  
Functional descriptions of pins 1—100 are found in Section 6, Signal Descriptions.  
Table 1. Pin Descriptions (continued)  
PBGA Pin  
G12  
BQFP Pin TQFP Pin  
Symbol  
SADD2/PB3††  
Type  
Name/Function  
74  
75  
77  
78  
79  
61  
62  
64  
65  
66  
I/O* SIO2 Multiprocessor Address/PHIF Data Bus Bit 3.  
F11  
F12  
E11  
E12  
DOEN2/PB2 I/O* SIO2 Data Output Enable/PHIF Data Bus Bit 2.  
DI2/PB1  
ICK2/PB0  
I/O* SIO2 Data Input/PHIF Data Bus Bit 1.  
I/O* SIO2 Input Clock/PHIF Data Bus Bit 0.  
O* SIO2 Output Buffer Empty/PHIF Output Buffer  
Empty.  
OBE2/POBE  
D11  
D12  
C11  
C12  
80  
81  
82  
83  
67  
68  
69  
70  
IBF2/PIBF  
O* SIO2 Input Buffer Full/PHIF Input Buffer Full.  
OLD2/PODS I/O* SIO2 Output Load/PHIF Output Data Strobe.  
ILD2/PIDS I/O* SIO2 Input Load/PHIF Input Data Strobe.  
SYNC2/PBSEL I/O* SIO2 Multiprocessor Synchronization/PHIF Byte  
Select.  
C10  
B12  
B11  
A12  
A11  
B10  
A10  
B9  
A9  
B8  
A8  
B7  
84  
85  
86  
87  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
98  
99  
71  
72  
73  
74  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
85  
86  
DO2/PSTAT I/O* SIO2 Data Output/PHIF Status Register Select.  
OCK2/PCSN I/O* SIO2 Output Clock/PHIF Chip Select Not.  
DOEN1  
SADD1††  
SYNC1  
DO1  
I/O* SIO1 Data Output Enable.  
I/O* SIO1 Multiprocessor Address.  
I/O* SIO1 Multiprocessor Synchronization.  
O* SIO1 Data Output.  
OLD1  
OCK1  
ICK1  
I/O* SIO1 Output Load.  
I/O* SIO1 Output Clock.  
I/O* SIO1 Input Clock.  
ILD1  
I/O* SIO1 Input Load.  
DI1  
I
SIO1 Data Input.  
IBF1  
O* SIO1 Input Buffer Full.  
A7  
OBE1  
VSS  
O* SIO1 Output Buffer Empty.  
D4, D5, D6, D7, 6, 14, 26, 93, 1, 13,  
D8, E4, E5, E6, 38, 49, 64, 25, 36, 51,  
E7, E8, E9, F4, 76, 89, 97 63, 76, 84  
F5, F6, F7, F8,  
P
Ground.  
F9, G4, G5, G6,  
G7, G8, G9, H4,  
H5, H6, H7, H8,  
H9, J4, J5, J6, J7,  
J8, J9  
C4, C5, C6, C7, 13, 22, 30, 100, 9, 17,  
C8, D3, D9, D10, 39, 55, 88, 26, 42, 75,  
VDD  
P
Power Supply.  
E3, E10, F3, F10,  
G3, G10, H3,  
H10, J3, J10, K4,  
K5, K6, K7, K8,  
K9  
100  
87  
M10  
M12  
C9  
60  
63  
47  
50  
VDDA  
VSSA  
P
P
Analog Power Supply.  
Analog Ground.  
No Die Connect—Unused.  
*
3-states when RSTB = 0, or by JTAG control.  
§
3-states when RSTB = 0 and INT0 = 1. Output = 1 when RSTB = 0 and INT0 = 0, except CKO, which is free-running.  
Pull-up devices on input.  
3-states by JTAG control.  
** See Section 7, Mask-Programmable Options.  
†† For SIO multiprocessor applications, add 5 kexternal pull-up resistors to SADD1 and/or SADD2 for proper initialization.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
7
Data Sheet  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture  
January 2002  
space) and data memory (Y memory space). The  
DSP1600 core automatically controls the EMUX. In-  
structions can transparently reference external memory  
from either set of internal buses. A sequencer allows a  
single instruction to access both the X and the Y exter-  
nal memory spaces.  
The DSP1629 device is a 16-bit, fixed-point program-  
mable digital signal processor (DSP). The DSP1629  
consists of a DSP1600 core together with on-chip mem-  
ory and peripherals. Added architectural features give  
the DSP1629 high program efficiency for signal coding  
applications.  
Clock Synthesis  
The DSP powers up with a 1X input clock (CKI/CKI2) as  
the source for the processor clock. An on-chip clock  
synthesizer (PLL) can also be used to generate the sys-  
tem clock for the DSP, which will run at a frequency mul-  
tiple of the input clock. The clock synthesizer is  
deselected and powered down on reset. For low-power  
operation, an internally generated slow clock can be  
used to drive the DSP. If both the clock synthesizer and  
the internally generated slow clock are selected, the  
slow clock will drive the DSP; however, the synthesizer  
will continue to run.  
4.1 DSP1629 Architectural Overview  
Figure 4, DSP1629 Block Diagram, shows a block dia-  
gram of the DSP1629. The following modules make up  
the DSP1629.  
DSP1600 Core  
The DSP1600 core is the heart of the DSP1629 chip.  
The core contains data and address arithmetic units,  
and control for on-chip memory and peripherals. The  
core provides support for external memory wait-states  
and on-chip, dual-port RAM, and features vectored in-  
terrupts and a trap mechanism.  
The clock synthesizer and other programmable clock  
sources are discussed in Section 4.12, Clock Synthesis.  
The use of these programmable clock sources for pow-  
er management is discussed in Section 4.13, Power  
Management.  
Dual-Port RAM (DPRAM)  
The DSP1629x16 contains 16 banks of zero wait-state  
memory and the DSP1629x10 contains 10 banks of  
zero wait-state memory. Each bank consists of 1K  
16-bit words and has separate address and data ports  
to the instruction/coefficient and data memory spaces.  
A program can reference memory from either space.  
The DSP1600 core automatically performs the required  
multiplexing. If references to both ports of a single bank  
are made simultaneously, the DSP1600 core automati-  
cally inserts a wait-state and performs the data port ac-  
cess first, followed by the instruction/coefficient port  
access.  
Bit Manipulation Unit (BMU)  
The BMU extends the DSP1600 core instruction set to  
provide more efficient bit operations on accumulators.  
The BMU contains logic for barrel shifting, normaliza-  
tion, and bit field insertion/extraction. The unit also con-  
tains a set of 36-bit alternate accumulators. The data in  
the alternate accumulators can be shuffled with the data  
in the main accumulators. Flags returned by the BMU  
mesh seamlessly with the DSP1600 conditional instruc-  
tions.  
Bit Input/Output (BIO)  
A program can be downloaded from slow, off-chip mem-  
ory into DPRAM, and then executed without wait-states.  
DPRAM is also useful for improving convolution perfor-  
mance in cases where the coefficients are adaptive.  
Since DPRAM can be downloaded through the JTAG  
port, full-speed remote in-circuit emulation is possible.  
DPRAM can also be used for downloading self-test  
code via the JTAG port.  
The BIO provides convenient and efficient monitoring  
and control of eight individually configurable pins. When  
configured as outputs, the pins can be individually set,  
cleared, or toggled. When configured as inputs, individ-  
ual pins or combinations of pins can be tested for pat-  
terns. Flags returned by the BIO mesh seamlessly with  
conditional instructions.  
Read-Only Memory (ROM)  
Serial Input/Output Units (SIO and SIO2)  
The DSP1629 contains 48K 16-bit words of zero wait-  
state, mask-programmable ROM for program and fixed  
coefficients.  
SIO and SIO2 offer asynchronous, full-duplex, double-  
buffered channels that operate at up to 25 Mbits/s (for a  
20 ns instruction cycle in a nonmultiprocessor configu-  
ration), and easily interface with other Agere Systems’  
fixed-point DSPs in a multiple-processor environment.  
Commercially available codecs and time-division multi-  
plex (TDM) channels can be interfaced to the serial I/O  
ports with few, if any, additional components. SIO2 is  
identical to SIO.  
External Memory Multiplexer (EMUX)  
The EMUX is used to connect the DSP1629 to external  
memory and I/O devices. It supports read/write opera-  
tions from/to instruction/coefficient memory (X memory  
8
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
An 8-bit serial protocol channel may be transmitted in addition to the address of the called processor in multiproces-  
sor mode. This feature is useful for transmitting high-level framing information or for error detection and correction.  
SIO2 and BIO are pin-multiplexed with the PHIF.  
DB[15:0] AB[15:0]  
RWN  
EXM  
I/O  
EROM ERAMHI  
ERAMLO  
JTAG  
*
BOUNDARY SCAN  
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE & EMUX  
ioc  
TDO  
TDI  
jtag  
*
JCON  
TCK  
TMS  
*
ID  
DUAL-PORT  
RAM  
ROM  
48K x 16  
16K/10K x 16†  
*
BYPASS  
HDS  
TRST  
*
BREAKPOINT  
CKI  
CKI2  
CKO  
RSTB  
STOP  
TRAP  
INT[1:0]  
IACK  
YAB YDB XDB XAB  
DSP1600 CORE  
IDB  
BMU  
aa0  
*
TRACE  
aa1  
ar0  
ar1  
ar2  
ar3  
TIMER  
timerc  
timer0  
SIO  
DI1  
VEC[3:0] OR IOBIT[7:4]  
DO2 OR PSTAT  
OLD2 OR PODS  
OCK2 OR PCSN  
OBE2 OR POBE  
SYNC2 OR PBSEL  
ICK2 OR PB0  
PHIF  
phifc  
ICK1  
sdx(OUT)  
ILD1  
srta  
tdms  
IBF1  
*
PSTAT  
powerc  
DO1  
pllc  
SIO2  
M
U
X
pdx0(IN)  
OCK1  
OLD1  
OBE1  
SYNC1  
SADD1  
DOEN1  
sdx2(OUT)  
pdx0(OUT)  
sdx(IN)  
ILD2 OR PIDS  
BIO  
sbit  
srta2  
tdms2  
DI2 OR PB1  
sioc  
IBF2 OR PIBF  
cbit  
DOEN2 OR PB2  
SADD2 OR PB3  
IO BIT[3:0] OR PB[7:4]  
sdx2(IN)  
sioc2  
saddx  
saddx2  
5-4142 (F).f  
*
These registers are accessible through the pins only.  
16K x 16 for the DSP1629x16, 10K x 16 for the DSP1629x10.  
Figure 4. DSP1629 Block Diagram  
Agere Systems Inc.  
9
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Table 2. DSP1629 Block Diagram Legend  
Symbol  
Name  
aa<0—1>  
ar<0—3>  
BIO  
Alternate Accumulators.  
Auxiliary BMU Registers.  
Bit Input/Output Unit.  
BMU  
Bit Manipulation Unit.  
BREAKPOINT  
BYPASS  
cbit  
Four Instruction Breakpoint Registers.  
JTAG Bypass Register.  
Control Register for BIO.  
Dual-Port RAM  
EMUX  
HDS  
Internal RAM (16 Kwords for DSP1629x16, 10 Kwords for DSP1629x10).  
External Memory Multiplexer.  
Hardware Development System.  
JTAG Device Identification Register.  
Internal Data Bus.  
ID  
IDB  
ioc  
I/O Configuration Register.  
JCON  
jtag  
JTAG Configuration Registers.  
16-bit Serial/Parallel Register.  
pdx0(in)  
pdx0(out)  
PHIF  
Parallel Data Transmit Input Register 0.  
Parallel Data Transmit Output Register 0.  
Parallel Host Interface.  
phifc  
pllc  
Parallel Host Interface Control Register.  
Phase-Locked Loop Control Register.  
Power Control Register.  
Parallel Host Interface Status Register.  
Multiprocessor Protocol Register.  
Multiprocessor Protocol Register for SIO2.  
Status Register for BIO.  
powerc  
PSTAT  
saddx  
saddx2  
sbit  
sdx(in)  
sdx2(in)  
sdx(out)  
sdx2(out)  
SIO  
Serial Data Transmit Input Register.  
Serial Data Transmit Input Register for SIO2.  
Serial Data Transmit Output Register.  
Serial Data Transmit Output Register for SIO2.  
Serial Input/Output Unit.  
SIO2  
Serial Input/Output Unit #2.  
sioc  
Serial I/O Control Register.  
sioc2  
srta  
srta2  
tdms  
tdms2  
TIMER  
timer0  
timerc  
TRACE  
XAB  
Serial I/O Control Register for SIO2.  
Serial Receive/Transmit Address Register.  
Serial Receive/Transmit Address Register for SIO2.  
Serial I/O Time-division Multiplex Signal Control Register.  
Serial I/O Time-division Multiplex Signal Control Register for SIO2.  
Programmable Timer.  
Timer Running Count Register.  
Timer Control Register.  
Program Discontinuity Trace Buffer.  
Program Memory Address Bus.  
XDB  
Program Memory Data Bus.  
YAB  
Data Memory Address Bus.  
YDB  
Data Memory Data Bus.  
10  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
breakpoint will cause all the other processors to be  
trapped (see Section 4.3, Interrupts and Trap).  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Parallel Host Interface (PHIF)  
Pin Multiplexing  
The PHIF is a passive, 8-bit parallel port which can in-  
terface to an 8-bit bus containing other Agere Systems’  
DSPs, microprocessors, or peripheral I/O devices. The  
PHIF port supports either Motorola or Intel protocols, as  
well as 8-bit or 16-bit transfers, configured in software.  
The port data rate depends upon the instruction cycle  
rate. A 25 ns instruction cycle allows the PHIF to sup-  
port data rates up to 11.85 Mbytes/s, assuming the ex-  
ternal host device can transfer 1 byte of data in 25 ns.  
In order to allow flexible device interfacing while main-  
taining a low package pin count, the DSP1629 multi-  
plexes 16 package pins between BIO, PHIF, VEC[3:0],  
and SIO2.  
Upon reset, the vectored interrupt indication signals,  
VEC[3:0], are connected to the package pins while  
IOBIT[4:7] are disconnected. Setting bit 12, EBIOH, of  
the ioc register connects IOBIT[4:7] to the package pins  
and disconnects VEC[3:0].  
The PHIF is accessed in two basic modes: 8-bit or  
16-bit mode. In 8-bit mode, only the low byte is access-  
ed. In 16-bit mode, the host determines an access of the  
high or low byte. Software-programmable features al-  
low for a glueless host interface to microprocessors  
(see Section 4.8, Parallel Host Interface (PHIF)).  
Upon reset, the parallel host interface (PHIF) is con-  
nected to the package pins while the second serial port  
(SIO2) and IOBIT[3:0] are disconnected. Setting bit 10,  
ESIO2, of the ioc register connects the SIO2 and  
IOBIT[3:0] and disconnects the PHIF.  
Timer  
Power Management  
The timer can be used to provide an interrupt at the ex-  
piration of a programmed interval. The interrupt may be  
single or repetitive. More than nine orders of magnitude  
of interval selection are provided. The timer may be  
stopped and restarted at any time.  
Many applications require programmable sleep modes  
for power management. There are three different con-  
trol mechanisms for achieving low-power operation: the  
powerc control register, the STOP pin, and the AWAIT  
bit in the alf register. The AWAIT bit in the alf register al-  
lows the processor to go into a power-saving standby  
mode until an interrupt occurs. The powerc register con-  
figures various power-saving modes by controlling inter-  
nal clocks and peripheral I/O units. The STOP pin  
controls the internal processor clock. The various power  
management options may be chosen based on power  
consumption and/or wake-up latency requirements.  
Hardware Development System (HDS) Module  
The on-chip HDS performs instruction breakpointing  
and branch tracing at full speed without additional off-  
chip hardware. Using the JTAG port, the breakpointing  
is set up and the trace history is read back. The port  
works in conjunction with the HDS code in the on-chip  
ROM and the hardware and software in a remote com-  
puter. The HDS code must be linked to the user's appli-  
cation code and reside in the first 4 Kwords of ROM.  
The on-chip HDS cannot be used with the secure ROM  
masking option (see Section 7.3, ROM Security Op-  
tions).  
4.2 DSP1600 Core Architectural Overview  
Figure 5, DSP1600 Core Block Diagram, shows a block  
diagram of the DSP1600 core.  
System Cache and Control Section (SYS)  
Four hardware breakpoints can be set on instruction ad-  
dresses. A counter can be preset with the number of  
breakpoints to receive before trapping the core. Break-  
points can be set in interrupt service routines. Alternate-  
ly, the counter can be preset with the number of cache  
instructions to execute before trapping the core.  
This section of the core contains a 15-word cache mem-  
ory and controls the instruction sequencing. It handles  
vectored interrupts and traps, and also provides decod-  
ing for registers outside of the DSP1600 core. SYS  
stretches the processor cycle if wait-states are required  
(wait-states are programmable for external memory ac-  
cesses). SYS sequences downloading via JTAG of self-  
test programs to on-chip, dual-port RAM.  
Every time the program branches instead of executing  
the next sequential instruction, the addresses of the in-  
structions executed before and after the branch are  
caught in circular memory. The memory contains the  
last four pairs of program discontinuities for hardware  
tracing.  
The cache loop iteration count can be specified at run  
time under program control as well as at assembly time.  
In systems with multiple processors, the processors  
may be configured so that any processor reaching a  
Agere Systems Inc.  
11  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
The YAAU allows direct (or indexed) addressing of data  
memory. In direct addressing, the 16-bit base register  
(ybase) supplies the 11 most significant bits of the ad-  
dress. The direct data instruction supplies the remaining  
5 bits to form an address to Y memory space and also  
specifies one of 16 registers for the source or destina-  
tion.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Data Arithmetic Unit (DAU)  
The data arithmetic unit (DAU) contains a 16 x 16-bit  
parallel multiplier that generates a full 32-bit product in  
one instruction cycle. The product can be accumulated  
with one of two 36-bit accumulators. The accumulator  
data can be directly loaded from, or stored to, memory  
in two 16-bit words with optional saturation on overflow.  
The arithmetic logic unit (ALU) supports a full set of  
arithmetic and logical operations on either 16-bit or  
32-bit data. A standard set of flags can be tested for  
conditional ALU operations, branches, and subroutine  
calls. This procedure allows the processor to perform as  
a powerful 16-bit or 32-bit microprocessor for logical  
and control applications. The available instruction set is  
fully compatible with the DSP1627 instruction set. See  
Section 5.1, Instruction Set, for more information on the  
instruction set.  
X-Space Address Arithmetic Unit (XAAU)  
The XAAU supports high-speed, register-indirect, in-  
struction/coefficient memory addressing with postmodi-  
fication of the register. The 16-bit pt register is used for  
addressing coefficients. The signed register i holds a  
user-defined postincrement. A fixed postincrement of  
+1 is also available. Register PC is the program  
counter. Registers pr and pi hold the return address for  
subroutine calls and interrupts, respectively.  
The XAAU decodes the 16-bit instruction/coefficient ad-  
dress and produces enable signals for the appropriate  
X memory segment. The addressable X segments are  
48 Kwords of internal ROM, up to 16 Kwords of DPRAM  
for the DSP1629x16 or up to 10 Kwords of DPRAM for  
the DSP1629x10, and external ROM.  
The user also has access to two additional DAU regis-  
ters. The psw register contains status information from  
the DAU (see Table 26, Processor Status Word (psw)  
Register). The arithmetic control register, auc, is used to  
configure some of the features of the DAU (see Table  
27, Arithmetic Unit Control (auc) Register), including  
single-cycle squaring. The auc register alignment field  
supports an arithmetic shift left by one and left or right  
by two. The auc register is cleared by reset.  
The locations of these memory segments depend upon  
the memory map selected (see Table 5, Instruction/Co-  
efficient Memory Maps). A security mode can be select-  
ed by mask option. This prevents unauthorized access  
to the contents of on-chip ROM (see Section 7, Mask-  
Programmable Options).  
The counters c0 to c2 are signed, 8 bits wide, and may  
be used to count events such as the number of times  
the program has executed a sequence of code. They  
are controlled by the conditional instructions and pro-  
vide a convenient method of program looping.  
4.3 Interrupts and Trap  
The DSP1629 supports prioritized, vectored interrupts  
and a trap. The device has eight internal hardware  
sources of program interrupt and two external interrupt  
pins. Additionally, there is a trap pin and a trap signal  
from the hardware development system (HDS). A soft-  
ware interrupt is available through the icall instruction.  
The icall instruction is reserved for use by the HDS.  
Each of these sources of interrupt and trap has a unique  
vector address and priority assigned to it.  
Y-Space Address Arithmetic Unit (YAAU)  
The YAAU supports high-speed, register-indirect, com-  
pound, and direct addressing of data (Y) memory. Four  
general-purpose, 16-bit registers, r0 to r3, are available  
in the YAAU. These registers can be used to supply the  
read or write addresses for Y-space data. The YAAU  
also decodes the 16-bit data memory address and out-  
puts individual memory enables for the data access.  
The YAAU can address the six 1 Kword banks of on-  
chip DPRAM or three external data memory segments.  
Up to 48 Kwords of off-chip RAM are addressable, with  
16K addresses reserved for internal RAM.  
The software interrupt and the traps are always enabled  
and do not have a corresponding bit in the ins register.  
Other vectored interrupts are enabled in the inc register  
(see Table 29, Interrupt Control (inc) Register) and  
monitored in the ins register (see Table 30, Interrupt  
Status (ins) Register). When the DSP1629 goes into an  
interrupt or trap service routine, the IACK pin is assert-  
ed. In addition, pins VEC[3:0] encode which interrupt/  
trap is being serviced. Table 4, Interrupt Vector Table,  
details the encoding used for VEC[3:0].  
Two 16-bit registers, rb and re, allow zero-overhead  
modulo addressing of data for efficient filter implemen-  
tations. Two 16-bit signed registers, j and k, are used to  
hold user-defined postmodification increments. Fixed  
increments of +1, –1, and +2 are also available. Four  
compound-addressing modes are provided to make  
read/write operations more efficient.  
12  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
XDB  
XAAU  
i (16)  
1
SYS  
MUX  
ADDER  
XAB  
CACHE  
CONTROL  
pr (16)  
pi (16)  
cloop (7)  
pc (16)  
pt (16)  
alf (16)  
ins (16)  
inc (16)  
mwait (16)  
IDB  
BRIDGE  
YDB  
YAAU  
–1, 0, 1, 2  
DAU  
yh (16)  
x (16)  
yl (16)  
j (16)  
k (16)  
16 x 16 MPY  
p (32)  
32  
MUX  
SHIFT (–2, 0, 1, 2)  
ADDER  
YAB  
MUX  
rb (16)  
36  
c0 (8)  
re (16)  
MUX  
c1 (8)  
c2 (8)  
ALU/SHIFT  
CMP  
auc (16)  
r0 (16)  
r1 (16)  
r2 (16)  
r3 (16)  
a0 (36)  
a1 (36)  
psw (16)  
16  
ybase (16)  
EXTRACT/SAT  
5-1741 (F).b  
Figure 5. DSP1600 Core Block Diagram  
Agere Systems Inc.  
13  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Table 3. DSP1600 Core Block Diagram Legend  
Symbol  
Name  
16 x 16 MPY  
16-bit x 16-bit Multiplier.  
a0—a1  
alf  
Accumulators 0 and 1 (16-bit halves specified as a0, a0l, a1, and a1l).*  
AWAIT, LOWPR, Flags.  
ALU/SHIFT  
auc  
c0—c2  
cloop  
CMP  
DAU  
i
Arithmetic Logic Unit/Shifter.  
Arithmetic Unit Control.  
Counters 0—2.  
Cache Loop Count.  
Comparator.  
Digital Arithmetic Unit.  
Increment Register for the X Address Space.  
Internal Data Bus.  
IDB  
inc  
Interrupt Control.  
ins  
Interrupt Status.  
j
Increment Register for the Y Address Space.  
Increment Register for the Y Address Space.  
Multiplexer.  
k
MUX  
mwait  
p
External Memory Wait-states Register.  
Product Register (16-bit halves specified as p, pl).  
Program Counter.  
PC  
pi  
Program Interrupt Return Register.  
Program Return Register.  
pr  
psw  
pt  
Processor Status Word.  
X Address Space Pointer.  
r0—r3  
rb  
Y Address Space Pointers.  
Modulo Addressing Register (begin address).  
Modulo Addressing Register (end address).  
System Cache and Control Section.  
Multiplier Input Register.  
re  
SYS  
x
XAAU  
XAB  
XDB  
YAAU  
YAB  
YDB  
ybase  
y
X-Space Address Arithmetic Unit.  
X-Space Address Bus.  
X-Space Data Bus.  
Y-Space Address Arithmetic Unit.  
Y-Space Address Bus.  
Y-Space Data Bus.  
Direct Addressing Base Register.  
DAU Register (16-bit halves specified as y, yl).  
*
F3 ALU instructions with immediates require specifying the high half of the accumulators as a0h and a1h.  
14  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Signaling Interrupt Service Status  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Five pins of DSP1629 are devoted to signaling interrupt  
service status. The IACK pin goes high while any inter-  
rupt or user trap is being serviced, and goes low when  
the ireturn instruction from the service routine is issued.  
Four pins, VEC[3:0], carry a code indicating which of the  
interrupts or trap is being serviced. Table 4, Interrupt  
Vector Table, contains the encodings used by each in-  
terrupt.  
Interruptibility  
Vectored interrupts are serviced only after the execution  
of an interruptible instruction. If more than one vectored  
interrupt is asserted at the same time, the interrupts are  
serviced sequentially according to their assigned priori-  
ties. See Table 4, Interrupt Vector Table, for the priori-  
ties assigned to the vectored interrupts. Interrupt  
service routines, branch and conditional branch instruc-  
tions, cache loops, and instructions that only decrement  
one of the RAM pointers, r0 to r3 (e.g., *r3− −), are not  
interruptible.  
Traps due to HDS breakpoints have no effect on either  
the IACK or VEC[3:0] pins. Instead, they show the inter-  
rupt state or interrupt source of the DSP when the trap  
occurred.  
A trap is similar to an interrupt, but it gains control of the  
processor by branching to the trap service routine even  
when the current instruction is noninterruptible. It may  
not be possible to return to normal instruction execution  
from the trap service routine since the machine state  
cannot always be saved. In particular, program execu-  
tion cannot be continued from a trapped cache loop or  
interrupt service routine. While in a trap service routine,  
another trap is ignored.  
Clearing Interrupts  
The PHIF interrupts (PIBF and POBE) are cleared by  
reading or writing the parallel host interface data trans-  
mit registers pdx0[in] and pdx0[out], respectively. The  
SIO and SIO2 interrupts (IBF, IBF2, OBE, and OBE2)  
are cleared one instruction cycle AFTER reading or writ-  
ing the serial data registers, (sdx[in], sdx2[in], sdx[out],  
or sdx2[out]). To account for this added latency, the  
user must ensure that a single instruction (NOP or any  
other valid DSP16XX instruction) follows the sdx regis-  
ter read or write instruction prior to exiting an interrupt  
service routine (via an ireturn or goto pi instruction) or  
before checking the ins register for the SIO flag status.  
Adding this instruction ensures that interrupts are not  
reported incorrectly following an ireturn or that stale  
flags are not read from the ins register. The JTAG inter-  
rupt (JINT) is cleared by reading the jtag register.  
When set to 1, the status bits in the ins register indicate  
that an interrupt has occurred. The processor must  
reach an interruptible state (completion of an interrupt-  
ible instruction) before an enabled vectored interrupt will  
be acted on. An interrupt will not be serviced if it is not  
enabled. Polled interrupt service can be implemented  
by disabling the interrupt in the inc register and then  
polling the ins register for the expected event.  
Vectored Interrupts  
Three of the vectored interrupts are cleared by writing to  
the ins register. Writing a 1 to the INT0, INT1, or TIME  
bits in the ins will cause the corresponding interrupt sta-  
tus bit to be cleared to a logic 0. The status bit for these  
vectored interrupts is also cleared when the ireturn in-  
struction is executed, leaving set any other vectored in-  
terrupts that are pending.  
Table 29, Interrupt Control (inc) Register, and Table 30,  
Interrupt Status (ins) Register, show the inc and ins reg-  
isters, respectively. A logic 1 written to any bit of inc en-  
ables (or unmasks) the associated interrupt. If the bit is  
cleared to a logic 0, the interrupt is masked. Note that  
neither the software interrupt nor traps can be masked.  
The occurrence of an interrupt that is not masked will  
cause the program execution to transfer to the memory  
location pointed to by that interrupt's vector address, as-  
suming no other interrupt is being serviced (see Table  
4, Interrupt Vector Table). The occurrence of an inter-  
rupt that is masked causes no automatic processor ac-  
tion, but will set the corresponding status bit in the ins  
register. If a masked interrupt occurs, it is latched in the  
ins register, but the interrupt is not taken. When un-  
latched, this latched interrupt will initiate automatic pro-  
cessor interrupt action. See the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/  
29 Digital Signal Processor Information Manual for a  
more detailed description of the interrupts.  
Traps  
The TRAP pin of the DSP1629 is a bidirectional signal.  
At reset, it is configured as an input to the processor.  
Asserting the TRAP pin will force a user trap. The trap  
mechanism is used for two purposes. It can be used by  
an application to rapidly gain control of the processor for  
asynchronous time-critical event handling (typically for  
catastrophic error recovery). It is also used by the HDS  
for breakpointing and gaining control of the processor.  
Separate vectors are provided for the user trap (0x46)  
and the HDS trap (0x3). Traps are not maskable.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
15  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Table 4. Interrupt Vector Table  
Source  
No Interrupt  
Software Interrupt  
INT0  
Vector  
Priority  
VEC[3:0]  
0x0  
0x1  
0x2  
0x8  
0x9  
0xc  
Issued by  
0x2  
1
icall  
0x1  
2
pin  
JINT  
0x42  
0x4  
3
jtag in  
INT1  
4
pin  
TIME  
0x10  
0x14  
0x18  
0x1c  
0x20  
0x24  
0x2c  
0x30  
0x34  
0x38  
0x3  
7
timer  
IBF2  
8
0xd  
0xe  
0x0  
0x1  
0x2  
0x3  
0x4  
0x5  
0x6  
SIO2 in  
OBE2  
9
SIO2 out  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
IBF  
10  
11  
12  
SIO in  
14  
OBE  
15  
SIO out  
PIBF  
16  
PHIF in  
POBE  
17  
18  
PHIF out  
breakpoint, jtag, or pin  
pin  
*
TRAP from HDS  
TRAP from User  
0x46  
19 = highest  
0x7  
* Traps due to HDS breakpoints have no effect on VEC[3:0] pins.  
A trap has four cycles of latency. At most, two instruc-  
tions will execute from the time the trap is received at  
the pin to when it gains control. An instruction that is ex-  
ecuting when a trap occurs is allowed to complete be-  
fore the trap service routine is entered. (Note that the  
instruction could be lengthened by wait-states.) During  
normal program execution, the pi register contains ei-  
ther the address of the next instruction (two-cycle in-  
struction executing), or the address following the next  
instruction (one-cycle instruction executing). In an inter-  
rupt service routine, pi contains the interrupt return ad-  
dress. When a trap occurs during an interrupt service  
routine, the value of the pi register may be overwritten.  
Specifically, it is not possible to return to an interrupt  
service routine from a user trap (0x46) service routine.  
Continuing program execution when a trap occurs dur-  
ing a cache loop is also not possible.  
gether. During HDS operations, one DSP is selected by  
the host software to be the master. The master proces-  
sor's TRAP pin is configured to be an output.  
The TRAP pins of the slave processors are configured  
as inputs. When the master processor reaches a break-  
point, the master's TRAP pin is asserted. The slave pro-  
cessors will respond to their TRAP input by beginning to  
execute the HDS code.  
AWAIT Interrupt (Standby or Sleep Mode)  
Setting the AWAIT bit (bit 15) of the alf register (alf =  
0x8000) causes the processor to go into a power-saving  
standby or sleep mode. Only the minimum circuitry on  
the chip required to process an incoming interrupt re-  
mains active. After the AWAIT bit is set, one additional  
instruction will be executed before the standby power-  
saving mode is entered. A PHIF or SIO word transfer  
will complete if already in progress. The AWAIT bit is re-  
set when the first interrupt occurs. The chip then wakes  
up and continues executing.  
The HDS trap causes circuitry to force the program  
memory map to MAP1 (with on-chip ROM starting at ad-  
dress 0x0) when the trap is taken. The previous memo-  
ry map is restored when the trap service routine exits by  
issuing an ireturn. The map is forced to MAP1 because  
the HDS code, if present, resides in the on-chip ROM.  
Two nop instructions should be programmed after the  
AWAIT bit is set. The first nop (one cycle) will be exe-  
cuted before sleeping; the second will be executed after  
the interrupt signal awakens the DSP and before the in-  
terrupt service routine is executed.  
Using the Agere Systems development tools, the TRAP  
pin may be configured to be an output, or an input vec-  
toring to address 0x3. In a multiprocessor environment,  
the TRAP pins of all the DSPs present can be tied to-  
16  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
an HDS trap, the memory map is forced to MAP1. The  
user's map selection is restored when the trap service  
routine has completed execution.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
The AWAIT bit should be set from within the cache if the  
code which is executing resides in external ROM where  
more than one wait-state has been programmed. This  
ensures that an interrupt will not disturb the device from  
completely entering the sleep state.  
MAP1  
MAP1 has the IROM starting at 0x0 and 1 Kword banks  
of DPRAM starting at 0xC000. MAP1 is used if  
DSP1629 has EXM low at reset and the LOWPR pa-  
rameter is programmed to zero. It is also used during an  
HDS trap.  
For additional power savings, set ioc = 0x0180 and tim-  
erc = 0x0040, in addition to setting alf = 0x8000. This  
will hold the CKO pin low and shut down the timer and  
prescaler (see Table 38, ioc Register, and Table 31,  
timerc Register).  
MAP2  
For a description of the control mechanisms for putting  
the DSP into low-power modes, see Section 4.13, Pow-  
er Management.  
MAP2 differs from MAP1 in that the lowest 48 Kwords  
reference external ROM (EROM). MAP2 is used if EXM  
is high at reset, the LOWPR parameter is programmed  
to zero, and an HDS trap is not in progress.  
4.4 Memory Maps and Wait-States  
MAP3  
The DSP1600 core implements a modified Harvard ar-  
chitecture that has separate on-chip 16-bit address and  
data buses for the instruction/coefficient (X) and data  
(Y) memory spaces. Table 5, Instruction/Coefficient  
Memory Maps, shows the instruction/coefficient memo-  
ry space maps for both the DSP1629x16 and  
DSP1629x10.  
MAP3 has the 1 Kword banks of DPRAM, starting at  
address 0x0. In MAP3, the 48 Kwords of IROM start at  
0x4000. MAP3 is used if EXM is low at reset, the LOW-  
PR bit is programmed to 1, and an HDS trap is not in  
progress. Note that this map is not available if the se-  
cure mask-programmable option has been ordered.  
The DSP1629 provides a multiplexed external bus  
which accesses external RAM (ERAM) and ROM  
(EROM). Programmable wait-states are provided for  
external memory accesses. The instruction/coefficient  
memory map is configurable to provide application flex-  
ibility. Table 6, Data Memory Maps, shows the data  
memory space, which has one map.  
MAP4  
MAP4 differs from MAP3 in that addresses above  
0x4000 reference external ROM (EROM). This map is  
used if the LOWPR bit is programmed to 1, an HDS trap  
is not in progress, and, either EXM is high during reset,  
or the secure mask-programmable option has been or-  
dered.  
Instruction/Coefficient Memory Map Selection  
Whenever the chip is reset using the RSTB pin, the de-  
fault memory map will be MAP1 or MAP2, depending  
upon the state of the EXM pin at reset. A reset through  
the HDS will not reinitialize the alf register, so the previ-  
ous memory map is retained.  
In determining which memory map to use, the proces-  
sor evaluates the state of two parameters. The first is  
the LOWPR bit (bit 14) of the alf register. The LOWPR  
bit of the alf register is initialized to 0 automatically at re-  
set. LOWPR controls the starting address in memory  
assigned to 1K banks of dual-port RAM. If LOWPR is  
low, internal dual-port RAM begins at address 0xC000.  
If LOWPR is high, internal dual-port RAM begins at ad-  
dress 0x0. LOWPR also moves IROM from 0x0 in  
MAP1 to 0x4000 in MAP3, and EROM from 0x0 in  
MAP2 to 0x4000 in MAP4.  
Boot from External ROM  
After RSTB goes from low to high, the DSP1629 comes  
out of reset and fetches an instruction from address  
zero of the instruction/coefficient space. The physical  
location of address zero is determined by the memory  
map in effect. If EXM is high at the rising edge of RSTB,  
MAP2 is selected. MAP2 has EROM at location zero;  
thus, program execution begins from external memory.  
If EXM is high and INT1 is low when RSTB rises, the  
mwait register defaults to 15 wait-states for all external  
memory segments. If INT1 is high, the mwait register  
defaults to 0 wait-states.  
The second parameter is the value of the EXM pin at re-  
set (pin 27 or pin 14, depending upon the package  
type). EXM determines whether the internal 48 Kwords  
ROM (IROM) will be addressable in the memory map.  
The Agere Systems development system tools, togeth-  
er with the on-chip HDS circuitry and the JTAG port, can  
independently set the memory map. Specifically, during  
Agere Systems Inc.  
17  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Table 5. Instruction/Coefficient Memory Maps  
DSP1629x16  
X Address  
AB[0:15]  
MAP 1*  
EXM = 0  
LOWPR = 0†  
IROM  
MAP 2  
EXM = 1  
LOWPR = 0  
MAP 3‡  
EXM = 0  
LOWPR = 1  
MAP 4  
EXM = 1  
LOWPR = 1  
0
4K  
6K  
0x0000  
0x1000  
0x1800  
0x3000  
0x4000  
0x5000  
0x6000  
0x7000  
0x8000  
0x9000  
0xA000  
0xB000  
0xC000  
0xD000  
0xD800  
0xE000  
0xFFFF  
EROM  
(48K)  
DPRAM  
(16K)  
DPRAM  
(16K)  
(48K)  
12K  
16K  
20K  
24K  
28K  
32K  
36K  
40K  
44K  
48K  
52K  
54K  
56K  
60K—64K  
IROM  
(48K)  
EROM  
(48K)  
DPRAM  
(16K)  
DPRAM  
(16K)  
DSP1629x10  
X Address  
AB[0:15]  
MAP 1*  
EXM = 0  
MAP 2  
EXM = 1  
MAP 3‡  
EXM = 0  
MAP 4  
EXM = 1  
LOWPR = 0†  
LOWPR = 0  
LOWPR = 1  
LOWPR = 1  
0
4K  
6K  
0x0000  
0x1000  
0x1800  
0x2800  
0x3000  
0x4000  
0x5000  
0x6000  
0x7000  
0x8000  
0x9000  
0xA000  
0xB000  
0xC000  
0xD000  
0xD800  
0xE000  
0xE800  
0xFFFF  
IROM  
(48K)  
EROM  
(48K)  
DPRAM  
(10K)  
DPRAM  
(10K)  
10K  
12K  
16K  
20K  
24K  
28K  
32K  
36K  
40K  
44K  
48K  
52K  
54K  
56K  
58K  
60K—64K  
Reserved  
(6K)  
Reserved  
(6K)  
IROM  
(48K)  
EROM  
(48K)  
DPRAM  
(10K)  
DPRAM  
(10K)  
Reserved  
(6K)  
Reserved  
(6K)  
* MAP1 is set automatically during an HDS trap. The user-selected map is restored at the end of the HDS trap service routine.  
† LOWPR is an alf register bit. The Agere Systems development system tools can independently set the memory map.  
‡ MAP3 is not available if the secure mask-programmable option is selected.  
18  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
1629x10 Data Memory Map (Not to Scale)  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Decimal  
Address  
Address in  
r0, r1, r2, r3  
Segment  
Table 6. Data Memory Maps  
0
0x0000  
DPRAM[1:10]  
1629x16 Data Memory Map (Not to Scale)  
Decimal  
Address  
Address in  
r0, r1, r2, r3  
Segment  
0
0x0000  
DPRAM[1:16]  
10K  
0x2800  
Reserved  
(6 K)  
16K  
0x4000  
0x4100  
IO  
16,640  
ERAMLO  
16K  
0x4000  
0x4100  
IO  
32K  
0x8000  
0xFFFF  
ERAMHI  
16,640  
ERAMLO  
64K – 1  
32K  
0x8000  
ERAMHI  
Wait-States  
The number of wait-states (from 0 to 15) used when ac-  
cessing each of the four external memory segments  
(ERAMLO, IO, ERAMHI, and EROM) is programmable  
in the mwait register (see Table 36, mwait Register).  
When the program references memory in one of the  
four external segments, the internal multiplexer is auto-  
matically switched to the appropriate set of internal bus-  
es, and the associated external enable of ERAMLO, IO,  
ERAMHI, or EROM is issued. The external memory cy-  
cle is automatically stretched by the number of wait-  
states configured in the appropriate field of the mwait  
register.  
64K – 1  
0xFFFF  
On the data memory side (see Table 6, Data Memory  
Maps), the 1K banks of dual-port RAM are located start-  
ing at address 0. Addresses from 0x4000 to 0x40FF ref-  
erence a 256-word memory-mapped I/O segment (IO).  
Addresses from 0x4100 to 0x7FFF reference the low  
external data RAM segment (ERAMLO). Addresses  
above 0x8000 reference high external data RAM (ER-  
AMHI).  
Agere Systems Inc.  
19  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
cess first, and then the external Y access, transparently  
to the programmer. Wait-states are maintained as pro-  
grammed in the mwait register. For example, let two in-  
structions be executed: the first reads a coefficient from  
EROM and writes data to ERAM; the second reads a  
coefficient from EROM and reads data from ERAM. The  
sequencer carries out the following steps at the external  
memory interface: read EROM, write ERAM, read ER-  
OM, and read ERAM. Each step is done in sequential  
one-instruction cycle steps, assuming zero wait-states  
are programmed. Note that the number of instruction  
cycles taken by the two instructions is four. Also, in this  
case, the write hold time is zero.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
4.5 External Memory Interface (EMI)  
The external memory interface supports read/write op-  
erations from instruction/coefficient memory, data  
memory, and memory-mapped I/O devices. The  
DSP1629 provides a 16-bit external address bus,  
AB[15:0], and a 16-bit external data bus, DB[15:0].  
These buses are multiplexed between the internal bus-  
es for the instruction/coefficient memory and the data  
memory. Four external memory segment enables,  
ERAMLO, IO, ERAMHI, and EROM, select the external  
memory segment to be addressed.  
The DSP1629 allows writing into external instruction/  
coefficient memory. By setting bit 11, WEROM, of the  
ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Register), writing to (or  
reading from) data memory or memory-mapped I/O as-  
serts the EROM strobe instead of ERAMLO, IO, or ER-  
AMHI. Therefore, with WEROM set, EROM appears in  
both Y space (replacing ERAM) and X space, in its nor-  
mal position.  
If a data memory location with an address between  
0x4100 and 0x7FFF is addressed, ERAMLO is asserted  
low.  
If one of the 256 external data memory locations, with  
an address greater than or equal to 0x4000, and less  
than or equal to 0x40FF, is addressed, IO is asserted  
low. IO is intended for memory-mapped I/O.  
Bit 14 of the ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Register),  
EXTROM, may be used with WEROM to download to a  
full 64K of external memory. When WEROM and EX-  
TROM are both asserted, address bit 15 (AB15) is held  
low, aliasing the upper 32K of external memory into the  
lower 32K.  
If a data memory location with an address greater than  
or equal to 0x8000 is addressed, ERAMHI is asserted  
low. When the external instruction/coefficient memory is  
addressed, EROM is asserted low.  
The flexibility provided by the programmable options of  
the external memory interface (see Table 36, mwait  
Register, and Table 38, ioc Register) allows the  
DSP1629 to interface gluelessly with a variety of com-  
mercial memory chips.  
When an access to internal memory is made, the  
AB[15:0] bus holds the last valid external memory ad-  
dress. Asserting the RSTB pin low 3-states the AB[15:0]  
bus. After reset, the AB[15:0] value is undefined.  
Each of the four external memory segments, ERAMLO,  
IO, ERAMHI, and EROM, has a number of wait-states  
that is programmable (from 0 to 15) by writing to the  
mwait register. When the program references memory  
in one of the four external segments, the internal multi-  
plexer is automatically switched to the appropriate set of  
internal buses, and the associated external enable of  
ERAMLO, IO, ERAMHI, or EROM is issued. The exter-  
nal memory cycle is automatically stretched by the num-  
ber of wait-states in the appropriate field of the mwait  
register.  
The leading edge of the memory segment enables can  
be delayed by approximately one-half a CKO period by  
programming the ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Regis-  
ter). This is used to avoid a situation in which two devic-  
es drive the data bus simultaneously.  
Bits 7, 8, and 13 of the ioc register select the mode of  
operation for the CKO pin (see Table 38, ioc Register).  
Available options are a free-running unstretched clock,  
a wait-stated sequenced clock (runs through two com-  
plete cycles during a sequenced external memory ac-  
cess), and a wait-stated clock based on the internal  
instruction cycle. These clocks drop to the low-speed in-  
ternal ring oscillator when SLOWCKI is enabled (see  
Section 4.13, Power Management). The high-to-low  
transitions of the wait-stated clock are synchronized to  
the high-to-low transition of the free-running clock. Also,  
the CKO pin provides either a continuously high level, a  
continuously low level, or changes at the rate of the in-  
ternal processor clock. This last option, only available  
with the small-signal input clock options, enables the  
DSP1629 CKI input buffer to deliver a full-rate clock to  
other devices while the DSP1629 itself is in one of the  
low-power modes.  
When writing to external memory, the RWN pin goes  
low for the external cycle. The external data bus,  
DB[15:0], is driven by the DSP1629, starting halfway  
through the cycle. The data driven on the external data  
bus is automatically held after the cycle for one addi-  
tional clock period unless an external read cycle imme-  
diately follows.  
The DSP1629 has one external address bus and one  
external data bus for both memory spaces. Since some  
instructions provide the capability of simultaneous ac-  
cess to both X space and Y space, some provision must  
be made to avoid collisions for external accesses. The  
DSP1629 has a sequencer that does the external X ac-  
20  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
signals are wrapped around internally from the output to  
the input (DO1 to DI1 and DO2 to DI2). To exercise loop-  
back, the SIO clocks (ICK1, ICK2, OCK1, and OCK2)  
should either all be in the active mode,  
16-bit condition, or each pair should be driven from one  
external source in passive mode. Similarly, pins ILD1  
(ILD2) and OLD1 (OLD2) must both be in active mode or  
tied together and driven from one external frame clock in  
passive mode. During loopback, DO1, DO2, DI1, DI2,  
ICK1, ICK2, OCK1, OCK2, ILD1, ILD2, OLD1, OLD2,  
SADD1, SADD2, SYNC1, SYNC2, DOEN1, and DOEN2  
are 3-stated.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
4.6 Bit Manipulation Unit (BMU)  
The BMU interfaces directly to the main accumulators in  
the DAU, providing the following features:  
Barrel shifting—logical and arithmetic, left and right  
shift  
Normalization and extraction of exponent  
Bit-field extraction and insertion  
These features increase the efficiency of the DSP in ap-  
plications such as control or data encoding and decod-  
ing. For example, data packing and unpacking, in which  
short data words are packed into one 16-bit word for  
more efficient memory storage, is very easy.  
Setting DODLY = 1 (sioc and sioc2) delays DO by one  
phase of OCK so that DO changes on the falling edge of  
OCK instead of the rising edge (DODLY = 0). This reduc-  
es the time available for DO to drive DI and to be valid  
for the rising edge of ICK, but increases the hold time on  
DO by half a cycle on OCK.  
In addition, the BMU provides two auxiliary accumula-  
tors, aa0 and aa1. In one instruction cycle, 36-bit data  
can be shuffled, or swapped, between one of the main  
accumulators and one of the alternate accumulators.  
The ar<0—3> registers are 16-bit registers that control  
the operations of the BMU. They store a value that de-  
termines the amount of shift or the width and offset fields  
for bit extraction or insertion. Certain operations in the  
BMU set flags in the DAU psw register and the alf regis-  
ter (see Table 26, Processor Status Word (psw) Regis-  
ter, and Table 35, alf Register). The ar<0—3> registers  
can also be used as general-purpose registers.  
Programmable Modes  
Programmable modes of operation for the SIO and SIO2  
are controlled by the serial I/O control registers (sioc and  
sioc2). These registers, shown in Table 22, Serial I/O  
Control Registers, are used to set the ports into various  
configurations. Both input and output operations can be  
independently configured as either active or passive.  
When active, the DSP1629 generates load and clock  
signals. When passive, load and clock signal pins are in-  
puts.  
The BMU instructions are detailed in Section 5.1, In-  
struction Set. For a thorough description of the BMU,  
see the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital Signal Proces-  
sor Information Manual.  
Since input and output can be independently configured,  
each SIO has four different modes of operation. Each of  
the sioc registers is also used to select the frequency of  
active clocks for that SIO. Finally, these registers are  
used to configure the serial I/O data formats. The data  
can be 8 bits or 16 bits long, and can also be input/output  
MSB first or LSB first. Input and output data formats can  
be independently configured.  
4.7 Serial I/O Units (SIOs)  
The serial I/O ports on the DSP1629 device provide a  
serial interface to many codecs and signal processors  
with little, if any, external hardware required. Each high-  
speed, double-buffered port (sdx and sdx2) supports  
back-to-back transmissions of data. SIO and SIO2 are  
identical. The output buffer empty (OBE and OBE2) and  
input buffer full (IBF and IBF2) flags facilitate the reading  
and/or writing of each serial I/O port by program-driven  
or interrupt-driven I/O. There are four selectable active  
clock speeds.  
Multiprocessor Mode  
The multiprocessor mode allows up to eight devices that  
support multiprocessor mode (codecs or DSP16XX de-  
vices) to be connected together to provide data trans-  
mission among any of the multiprocessor devices in the  
system. Either of the DSP1629’s SIO ports (SIO or  
SIO2) may be independently used for the multiprocessor  
mode. The multiprocessor interface is a four-wire inter-  
face, consisting of a data channel, an address/protocol  
channel, a transmit/receive clock, and a sync signal (see  
Figure 6, Multiprocessor Communication and Connec-  
tions). The DI1 and DO1 pins of all the DSPs are con-  
nected to transmit and receive the data channel. The  
SADD1 pins of all the DSPs are connected to transmit  
and receive the address/protocol channel. ICK1 and  
OCK1 should be tied together and driven from one  
source. The SYNC1 pins of all the DSPs are connected.  
A bit-reversal mode provides compatibility with either the  
most significant bit (MSB) first or least significant bit  
(LSB) first serial I/O formats (see Table 22, Serial I/O  
Control Registers). A multiprocessor I/O configuration is  
supported. This feature allows up to eight DSP161X de-  
vices to be connected together on an SIO port without  
requiring external glue logic.  
The serial data may be internally looped back by setting  
the SIO loopback control bit, SIOLBC, of the ioc register.  
SIOLBC affects both the SIO and SIO2. The data output  
Agere Systems Inc.  
21  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
In order to prevent multiple bus drivers, only one DSP  
can be programmed to transmit in a particular time slot.  
In addition, it is important to note that the address/pro-  
tocol channel is 3-stated in any time slot that is not being  
driven.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
In the configuration shown in Figure 6, Multiprocessor  
Communication and Connections, the master DSP  
(DSP0) generates active SYNC1 and OCK1 signals  
while the slave DSPs use the SYNC1 and OCK1 signals  
in passive mode to synchronize operations. In addition,  
all DSPs must have their ILD1 and OLD1 signals in ac-  
tive mode.  
Therefore, to prevent spurious inputs, the address/pro-  
tocol channel should be pulled up to VDD with a 5 kre-  
sistor, or it should be guaranteed that the bus is driven  
in every time slot. (If the SYNC1 signal is externally gen-  
erated, then this pull-up is required for correct initializa-  
tion.)  
While ILD1 and OLD1 are not required externally for  
multiprocessor operation, they are used internally in the  
DSP's SIO. Setting the LD field of the master's sioc reg-  
ister to a logic level 1 will ensure that the active genera-  
tion of SYNC1, ILD1, and OLD1 is derived from OCK1  
(see Table 22, Serial I/O Control Registers). With this  
configuration, all DSPs should use ICK1 (tied to OCK1)  
in passive mode to avoid conflicts on the clock (CK) line  
(see the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital Signal Pro-  
cessor Information Manual for more information).  
Each SIO also has a fully decoded transmitting address  
specified by the srta register transmit address field (bits  
7—0). This is used to transmit information regarding the  
destination(s) of the data. The fully decoded receive ad-  
dress specified by the srta register receive address field  
(bits 15—8) determines which data will be received.  
The SIO protocol channel data is controlled via the sad-  
dx register. When the saddx register is written, the lower  
8 bits contain the 8-bit protocol field. On a read, the  
high-order 8 bits read from saddx are the most recently  
received protocol field sent from the transmitting DSP's  
saddx output register. The low-order 8 bits are read as  
0s.  
Four registers (per SIO) configure the multiprocessor  
mode: the time-division multiplexed slot register (tdms  
or tdms2), the serial receive and transmit address reg-  
ister (srta or srta2), the serial data transmit register (sdx  
or sdx2), and the multiprocessor serial address/protocol  
register (saddx or saddx2).  
An example use of the protocol channel is to use the top  
3 bits of the saddx value as an encoded source address  
for the DSPs on the multiprocessor bus. This leaves the  
remaining 5 bits available to convey additional control  
information, such as whether the associated field is an  
opcode or data, or whether it is the last word in a trans-  
fer, etc. These bits can also be used to transfer parity in-  
formation about the data. Alternatively, the entire field  
can be used for data transmission, boosting the band-  
width of the port by 50%.  
Multiprocessor mode requires no external logic and  
uses a TDM interface with eight 16-bit time slots per  
frame. The transmission in any time slot consists of  
16 bits of serial data in the data channel and 16 bits of  
address and protocol information in the address/proto-  
col channel. The address information consists of the  
transmit address field of the srta register of the transmit-  
ting device. The address information is transmitted con-  
currently with the transmission of the first 8 bits of data.  
The protocol information consists of the transmit proto-  
col field written to the saddx register and is transmitted  
concurrently with the last 8 bits of data (see Table 25,  
Multiprocessor Protocol Registers). Data is received or  
recognized by other DSP(s) whose receive address  
matches the address in the address/protocol channel.  
Each SIO port has a user-programmable receive ad-  
dress and transmit address associated with it. The  
transmit and receive addresses are programmed in the  
srta register.  
Using SIO2  
The SIO2 functions the same as the SIO. Please refer  
to the Pin Multiplexing section for a description of pin  
multiplexing of BIO, PHIF, VEC[3:0], and SIO2.  
In multiprocessor mode, each device can send data in  
a unique time slot designated by the tdms register trans-  
mit slot field (bits 7—0). The tdms register has a fully de-  
coded transmit slot field in order to allow one DSP1629  
device to transmit in more than one time slot. This pro-  
cedure is useful for multiprocessor systems with less  
than eight DSP1629 devices when a higher bandwidth  
is necessary between certain devices in that system.  
The DSP operating during time slot 0 also drives  
SYNC1.  
22  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
DSP 0  
DSP 1  
DSP 7  
5 kΩ  
DATA CHANNEL  
CLOCK  
VDD  
ADDRESS/PROTOCOL CHANNEL  
SYNC SIGNAL  
5-4181 (F).a  
Figure 6. Multiprocessor Communication and Connections  
PHIF port, PCSN should be grounded. If PCSN is low  
4.8 Parallel Host Interface (PHIF)  
and the respective bits in the inc register are set, the as-  
sertion of PIDS and PODS by an external device caus-  
es the DSP1629 device to recognize an interrupt.  
The DSP1629 has an 8-bit parallel host interface for  
rapid transfer of data with external devices. This parallel  
port is passive (data strobes provided by an external de-  
vice) and supports either Motorola or Intel microcontrol-  
ler protocols. The PHIF also provides for 8-bit or  
16-bit data transfers. As a flexible host interface, it re-  
quires little or no glue logic to interface to other devices  
(e.g., microcontrollers, microprocessors, or another  
DSP).  
Programmability  
The parallel host interface can be programmed for 8-bit  
or 16-bit data transfers using bit 0, PMODE, of the phifc  
register. Setting PMODE selects 16-bit transfer mode.  
An input pin controlled by the host, PBSEL, determines  
an access of either the high or low bytes. The assertion  
level of the PBSEL input pin is configurable in software  
using bit 3 of the phifc register, PBSELF. Table 7, PHIF  
Function (8-bit and 16-bit Modes), summarizes the  
port's functionality as controlled by the PSTAT and PB-  
SEL pins and the PBSELF and PMODE fields.  
The data path of the PHIF consists of a 16-bit input buff-  
er, pdx0(in), and a 16-bit output buffer, pdx0(out). Two  
output pins, parallel input buffer full (PIBF) and parallel  
output buffer empty (POBE), indicate the state of the  
buffers. In addition, there are two registers used to con-  
trol and monitor the PHIF's operation: the parallel host  
interface control register (phifc, see Table 28, Parallel  
Host Interface Control (phifc) Register), and the PHIF  
status register (PSTAT, see Table 8, pstat Register as  
Seen on PB[7:0]). The PSTAT register, which reflects  
the state of the PIBF and POBE flags, can only be read  
by an external device when the PSTAT input pin is as-  
serted. The phifc register defines the programmable op-  
tions for this port.  
For 16-bit transfers, if PBSELF is zero, the PIBF and  
POBE flags are set after the high byte is transferred. If  
PBSELF is one, the flags are set after the low byte is  
transferred. In 8-bit mode, only the low byte is access-  
ed, and every completion of an input or output access  
sets PIBF or POBE.  
Bit 1 of the phifc register, PSTROBE, configures the  
port to operate either with an Intel protocol, where only  
the chip select (PCSN) and either of the data strobes  
(PIDS or PODS) are needed to make an access, or with  
a Motorola protocol, where the chip select (PCSN), a  
data strobe (PDS), and a read/write strobe (PRWN) are  
needed. PIDS and PODS are negative assertion data  
strobes while the assertion level of PDS is programma-  
ble through bit 2, PSTRB, of the phifc register.  
The function of the pins, PIDS and PODS, is program-  
mable to support both the Intel and Motorola protocols.  
The pin, PCSN, is an input that, when low, enables  
PIDS and PODS (or PRWN and PDS, depending on the  
protocol used). While PCSN is high, the DSP1629 ig-  
nores any activity on PIDS and/or PODS. If a DSP1629  
is intended to be continuously accessed through the  
Agere Systems Inc.  
23  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Finally, the assertion level of the output pins, PIBF and POBE, is controlled through bit 4, PFLAG. When PFLAG is  
set low, PIBF and POBE output pins have positive assertion levels. By setting bit 5, PFLAGSEL, the logical OR of  
PIBF and POBE flags (positive assertion) is seen at the output pin PIBF. By setting bit 7 in phifc, PSOBEF, the po-  
larity of the POBE flag in the status register, PSTAT, can be changed. PSOBEF has no effect on the POBE pin.  
Pin Multiplexing  
Please refer to the Pin Multiplexing section for a description of BIO, PHIF, VEC[3:0], and SIO2 pins.  
Table 7. PHIF Function (8-bit and 16-bit Modes)  
PMODE Field  
PSTAT Pin  
PBSEL Pin  
PBSELF Field = 0  
pdx0 low byte  
reserved  
PSTAT  
reserved  
pdx0 low byte  
pdx0 high byte  
PSTAT  
PBSELF Field = 1  
reserved  
0 (8-bit)  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
pdx0 low byte  
reserved  
PSTAT  
1 (16-bit)  
pdx0 high byte  
pdx0 low byte  
reserved  
1
1
1
reserved  
PSTAT  
Table 8. pstat Register as Seen on PB[7:0]  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
RSVD  
PIBF  
POBE  
allf (all false), somet (some true), and somef (some  
false). These flags can be used for conditional branch or  
special instructions. The state of these flags can be  
saved and restored by reading and writing bits 0 to 3 of  
the alf register (see Table 35, alf Register).  
4.9 Bit Input/Output Unit (BIO)  
The BIO controls the directions of eight bidirectional  
control I/O pins, IOBIT[7:0]. If a pin is configured as an  
output, it can be individually set, cleared, or toggled. If a  
pin is configured as an input, it can be read and/or test-  
ed.  
Table 9. BIO Operations  
MODE/  
MASK[n]  
DATA/  
PAT[n]  
Action  
The lower half of the sbit register (see Table 33, sbit  
Register) contains current values (VALUE[7:0]) of the  
eight bidirectional pins IOBIT[7:0]. The upper half of the  
sbit register (DIREC[7:0]) controls the direction of each  
of the pins. A logic 1 configures the corresponding pin as  
an output; a logic 0 configures it as an input. The upper  
half of the sbit register is cleared upon reset.  
DIREC[n]*  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
0 (Input)  
0 (Input)  
0 (Input)  
0 (Input)  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clear  
Set  
No Change  
Toggle  
No Test  
No Test  
The cbit register (see Table 34, cbit Register) contains  
two 8-bit fields: MODE/MASK[7:0] and DATA/PAT[7:0].  
The values of DATA/PAT[7:0] are cleared upon reset.  
The meaning of a bit in either field depends on whether  
it has been configured as an input or an output in sbit. If  
a pin has been configured to be an output, the meanings  
are MODE and DATA. For an input, the meanings are  
MASK and PAT (pattern). Table 9, BIO Operations,  
shows the functionality of the MODE/MASK and DATA/  
PAT bits based on the direction selected for the associ-  
ated IOBIT pin.  
Test for Zero  
Test for One  
* 0 n 7.  
If a BIO pin is switched from being configured as an out-  
put to being configured as an input and then back to be-  
ing configured as an output, the pin retains the previous  
output value.  
Pin Multiplexing  
Those bits that have been configured as inputs can be  
individually tested for 1 or 0. For those inputs that are  
being tested, there are four flags produced: allt (all true),  
Please refer to the Pin Multiplexing section for a descrip-  
tion of BIO, PHIF, VEC[3:0], and SIO2 pins.  
24  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
The PRESCALE field of the timerc register selects one  
of 16 possible clock rates for the timer input clock (see  
Table 31, timerc Register).  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
4.10 Timer  
Setting the DISABLE bit of the timerc register to a logic  
1 shuts down the timer and the prescaler for power sav-  
ings. Setting the TIMERDIS, bit 4, in the powerc register  
has the same effect of shutting down the timer. The  
DISABLE bit and the TIMERDIS bit are cleared by writ-  
ing a 0 to their respective registers to restore the normal  
operating mode.  
The interrupt timer is composed of the timerc (control)  
register, the timer0 register, the prescaler, and the  
counter itself. The timer control register (see Table 31,  
timerc Register) sets up the operational state of the tim-  
er and prescaler. The timer0 register is used to hold the  
counter reload value (or period register) and to set the  
initial value of the counter. The prescaler slows the  
clock to the timer by a number of binary divisors to allow  
for a wide range of interrupt delay periods.  
4.11 JTAG Test Port  
The counter is a 16-bit down counter that can be loaded  
with an arbitrary number from software. It counts down  
to 0 at the clock rate provided by the prescaler. Upon  
reaching 0 count, a vectored interrupt to program ad-  
dress 0x10 is issued to the DSP1629, providing the in-  
terrupt is enabled (bit 8 of inc and ins registers). The  
counter will then either wait in an inactive state for an-  
other command from software, or will automatically re-  
peat the last interrupting period, depending upon the  
state of the RELOAD bit in the timerc register.  
The DSP1629 uses a JTAG/IEEE 1149.1 standard five-  
wire test port (TDI, TDO, TCK, TMS, TRST) for self-test  
and hardware emulation. An instruction register, a  
boundary-scan register, a bypass register, and a device  
identification register have been implemented. The de-  
vice identification register coding for the DSP1629 is  
shown in Table 37, DSP1629 32-Bit JTAG ID Register.  
The instruction register (IR) is 4 bits long. The instruc-  
tion for accessing the device ID is 0xE (1110). The be-  
havior of the instruction register is summarized in Table  
10, JTAG Instruction Register. Cell 0 is the LSB (closest  
to TDO).  
When RELOAD is 0, the counter counts down from its  
initial value to 0, interrupts the DSP1629, and then  
stops, remaining inactive until another value is written to  
the timer0 register. Writing to the timer0 register causes  
both the counter and the period register to be written  
with the specified 16-bit number. When RELOAD is 1,  
the counter counts down from its initial value to 0, inter-  
rupts the DSP1629, automatically reloads the specified  
initial value from the period register into the counter,  
and repeats indefinitely. This provides for either a single  
timed interrupt event or a regular interrupt clock of arbi-  
trary period.  
Table 10. JTAG Instruction Register  
IR Cell #:  
3
Y
N
N
2
Y
N
N
1
N
N
Y
0
N
Y
N
Parallel Input?  
Always Logic 1?  
Always Logic 0?  
The first line shows the cells in the IR that capture from  
a parallel input in the capture-IR controller state. The  
second line shows the cells that always load a logic 1 in  
the capture-IR controller state. The third line shows the  
cells that always load a logic 0 in the capture-IR control-  
ler state. Cell 3 (MSB of IR) is tied to status signal PINT,  
and cell 2 is tied to status signal JINT. The state of these  
signals can therefore be captured during capture-IR and  
shifted out during SHIFT-IR controller states.  
The timer can be stopped and started by software, and  
can be reloaded with a new period at any time. Its count  
value, at the time of the read, can also be read by soft-  
ware. Due to pipeline stages, stopping and starting the  
timer may result in one inaccurate count or prescaled  
period. When the DSP1629 is reset, the bottom 6 bits of  
the timerc register and the timer0 register and counter  
are initialized to 0. This sets the prescaler to CKO/2*,  
turns off the reload feature, disables timer counting, and  
initializes the timer to its inactive state. The act of reset-  
ting the chip does not cause a timer interrupt. Note that  
the period register is not initialized on reset.  
Boundary-Scan Register  
All of the chip's inputs and outputs are incorporated in a  
JTAG scan path shown in Table 11, JTAG Boundary-  
Scan Register. The types of boundary-scan cells are as  
follows:  
The T0EN bit of the timerc register enables the clock to  
the timer. When T0EN is a 1, the timer counts down to-  
wards 0. When T0EN is a 0, the timer holds its current  
count.  
I = input cell  
O = 3-state output cell  
B = bidirectional (I/O) cell  
OE = 3-state control cell  
DC = bidirectional control cell  
*
Frequency of CKO/2 is equivalent to either CKI/2 for the PLL by-  
passed or related to CKI by the PLL multiplying factors. See Sec-  
tion 4.12, Clock Synthesis.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
25  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Note that the direction of shifting is from TDI to cell 104 to cell 103 . . . to cell 0 of TDO.  
Table 11. JTAG Boundary-Scan Register  
Cell  
0
Type  
Signal Name/Function  
Cell  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
Type  
Signal Name/Function  
OCK2/PCSN*  
OE Controls cells 1, 27—31  
B
1
O
I
CKO  
DC Controls cell 71  
DO2/PSTAT*  
DC Controls cell 73  
SYNC2/PBSEL*  
DC Controls cell 75  
ILD2/PIDS*  
DC Controls cell 77  
2
RSTB  
B
3
DC Controls cell 4  
4
B
I
TRAP  
STOP†  
IACK  
B
5
6
O
I
B
7
INT0  
8
OE Controls cells 6, 10—25, 49, 50, 78, 79  
B
O
O
OLD2/PODS*  
IBF2/PIBF*  
9
I
INT1  
10—25  
26  
27  
28—31  
32—36  
37  
38—48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
O
I
AB[0:15]  
OBE2/POBE*  
EXM  
DC Controls cell 81  
ICK2/PB0*  
DC Controls cell 83  
DI2/PB1*  
DC Controls cell 85  
DOEN2/PB2*  
DC Controls cell 87  
SADD2/PB3*  
DC Controls cell 89  
IOBIT0/PB4*  
DC Controls cell 91  
IOBIT1/PB5*  
DC Controls cell 93  
IOBIT2/PB6*  
DC Controls cell 95  
IOBIT3/PB7*  
DC Controls cell 97  
VEC3/IOBIT4*  
DC Controls cell 99  
VEC2/IOBIT5*  
DC Controls cell 101  
VEC1/IOBIT6*  
DC Controls cell 103  
O
O
B
RWN  
B
EROM, ERAMLO, ERAMHI, IO  
DB[0:4]  
B
DC Controls cells 32—36, 38—48  
B
O
O
I
DB[5:15]  
OBE1  
IBF1  
B
B
DI1  
DC Controls cell 53  
ILD1  
DC Controls cell 55  
ICK1  
DC Controls cell 57  
OCK1  
DC Controls cell 59  
OLD1  
OE Controls cell 61  
DO1  
DC Controls cell 63  
SYNC1  
DC Controls cell 65  
SADD1  
DC Controls cell 67  
DOEN1  
DC Controls cell 69  
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
O
B
B
B
B
B
I
VEC0/IOBIT7*  
CKI‡  
B
* Please refer to the Pin Multiplexing section for a description of pin multiplexing of BIO, PHIF, VEC[3:0], and SIO2.  
† Note that shifting a zero into this cell in the mode to scan a zero into the chip will disable the processor clocks just as the STOP pin will.  
‡ When the JTAG SAMPLE instruction is used, this cell will have a logic one regardless of the state of the pin.  
26  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
4.12 Clock Synthesis  
SLOWCKI  
powerc  
fSLOW CLOCK  
fCKI  
INTERNAL  
PROCESSOR  
CLOCK  
RING  
OSCILLATOR  
CKI INPUT CLOCK  
M
U
X
fCKI  
VCO CLOCK  
fVCO  
f
INTERNAL CLOCK  
÷ 2  
LOCK  
PLLSEL  
pllc  
(FLAG TO INDICATE LOCK  
CONDITION OF PLL)  
PHASE  
DETECTOR  
CHARGE  
PUMP  
VCO  
÷ N  
PLLEN  
LOOP  
FILTER  
Nbits[2:0]  
÷ M  
Mbits[4:0]  
LF[3:0]  
PLL/SYNTHESIZER  
5-4520 (F)  
Figure 7. Clock Source Block Diagram  
PLL Control Signals  
The DSP1629 provides an on-chip, programmable  
clock synthesizer. Figure 7, Clock Source Block Dia-  
gram, is the clock source diagram. The 1X CKI input  
clock, the output of the synthesizer, or a slow internal  
ring oscillator can be used as the source for the internal  
DSP clock. The clock synthesizer is based on a phase-  
locked loop (PLL), and the terms clock synthesizer and  
PLL are used interchangeably.  
The input to the PLL comes from one of the three mask-  
programmable clock options: CMOS or small-signal.  
The PLL cannot operate without an external input clock.  
To use the PLL, the PLL must first be allowed to stabi-  
lize and lock to the programmed frequency. After the  
PLL has locked, the LOCK flag is set and the lock detect  
circuitry is disabled. The synthesizer can then be used  
as the clock source. Setting the PLLSEL bit in the pllc  
register will switch sources from fCKI to fVCO/2 without  
glitching. It is important to note that the setting of the pllc  
register must be maintained. Otherwise, the PLL will  
seek the new set point. Every time the pllc register is  
written, the LOCK flag is reset.  
On powerup, CKI is used as the clock source for the  
DSP. This clock is used to generate the internal proces-  
sor clocks and CKO, where fCKI = fCKO. Setting the ap-  
propriate bits in the pllc control register (described in  
Table 32, Phase-Locked Loop Control (pllc) Register)  
will enable the clock synthesizer to become the clock  
source. The powerc register, which is discussed in Sec-  
tion 4.13, Power Management, can override the selec-  
tion to stop clocks or force the use of the slow clock for  
low-power operation.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
27  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Two other bits in the pllc register control the PLL. Clear-  
ing the PLLEN bit powers down the PLL; setting this bit  
powers up the PLL. Clearing the PLLSEL bit deselects  
the PLL so that the DSP is clocked by a 1X version of  
the CKI input; setting the PLLSEL bit selects the PLL-  
generated clock for the source of the DSP internal pro-  
cessor clock. The pllc register is cleared on reset and  
powerup. Therefore, the DSP comes out of reset with  
the PLL deselected and powered down. M and N should  
be changed only while the PLL is deselected. The val-  
ues of M and N should not be changed when powering  
down or deselecting the PLL.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
The frequency of the PLL output clock, fVCO, is deter-  
mined by the values loaded into the 3-bit N divider and  
the 5-bit M divider. When the PLL is selected and  
locked, the frequency of the internal processor clock is  
related to the frequency of CKI by the following equa-  
tions:  
fVCO = fCKI * M/N  
fINTERNAL CLOCK = fCKO = fVCO ÷ 2  
The frequency of the VCO, fVCO, must fall within the  
range listed in Table 63, PLL Electrical Specifications,  
VCO Frequency Ranges. Also note that fVCO must be at  
least twice fCKI.  
As previously mentioned, the PLL also provides a user  
flag, LOCK, to indicate when the loop has locked. When  
this flag is not asserted, the PLL output is unstable. The  
DSP should not be switched to the PLL-based clock  
without first checking that the lock flag is set. The lock  
flag is cleared by writing to the pllc register. When the  
PLL is deselected, it is necessary to wait for the PLL to  
relock before the DSP can be switched to the PLL-  
based clock. Before the input clock is stopped, the PLL  
should be powered down. Otherwise, the LOCK flag will  
not be reset and there may be no way to determine if the  
PLL is stable, once the input clock is applied again.  
The coding of the Mbits and Nbits is described as fol-  
lows:  
Mbits = M 2  
if (N = 1)  
Nbits = 0x7  
else  
Nbits = N 2  
The lock-in time depends on the frequency of operation  
and the values programmed for M and N (see Table 64,  
PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Register Set-  
tings).  
where N ranges from 1 to 8 and M ranges from 2 to 20.  
The loop filter bits LF[3:0] should be programmed ac-  
cording to Table 64, PLL Electrical Specifications and  
pllc Register Settings.  
28  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
PLL Programming Examples  
The following section of code illustrates how the PLL would be initialized on powerup, assuming the following oper-  
ating conditions:  
CKI input frequency = 10 MHz  
Internal clock and CKO frequency = 50 MHz  
VCO frequency = 100 MHz  
Input divide down count N = 2 (Set Nbits[2:0] = 000 to get N = 2, as described in Table 32, Phase-Locked Loop  
Control (pllc) Register.)  
Feedback down count M = 20 (Set Mbits[4:0] = 10010 to get M = 18 + 2 = 20, as described in Table 32, Phase-  
Locked Loop Control (pllc) Register.)  
The device would come out of reset with the PLL disabled and deselected.  
pllinit: pllc = 0x2912 /* Running CKI input clock at 10 MHz, set up counters in PLL */  
pllc = 0xA912 /* Power on PLL, but PLL remains deselected */  
call pllwait  
/* Loop to check for LOCK flag assertion */  
pllc = 0xE912 /* Select high-speed, PLL clock */  
goto start  
pllwait: if lock return  
goto pllwait  
/* User's code, now running at 50 MHz */  
Programming examples which illustrate how to use the PLL with the various power management modes are listed  
in Section 4.13, Power Management.  
Latency  
The switch between the CKI-based clock and the PLL-based clock is synchronous. This method results in the actual  
switch taking place several cycles after the PLLSEL bit is changed. During this time, actual code can be executed,  
but it will be at the previous clock rate. Table 12, Latency Times for Switching Between CKI and PLL-Based Clocks,  
shows the latency times for switching between CKI-based and PLL-based clocks. In the example given, the delay  
to switch to the PLL source is 1—4 CKO cycles, and to switch back is 11—31 CKO cycles.  
Table 12. Latency Times for Switching Between CKI and PLL-Based Clocks  
Minimum Latency (Cycles)  
Maximum Latency (Cycles)  
N + 2  
Switch to PLL-Based Clock  
Switch from PLL-Based Clock  
1
M/N + 1  
M + M/N + 1  
Frequency Accuracy and Jitter  
When using the PLL to multiply the input clock frequency up to the instruction clock rate, it is important to realize  
that although the average frequency of the internal clock and CKO will have about the same relative accuracy as  
the input clock, noise sources within the DSP will produce jitter on the PLL clock so that each individual clock period  
will have some error associated with it. The PLL is guaranteed only to have sufficiently low jitter to operate the DSP,  
and thus, this clock should not be used as an input to jitter-sensitive devices in the system.  
VDDA and VSSA Connections  
The PLL has its own power and ground pins, VDDA and VSSA. Additional filtering should be provided for VDDA in the  
form of a ferrite bead connected from VDDA to VDD and two decoupling capacitors (4.7 µF tantalum in parallel with  
a 0.01 µF ceramic) from VDDA to VSS. VSSA can be connected directly to the main ground plane. This recommen-  
dation is subject to change and may need to be modified for specific applications, depending on the characteristics  
of the supply noise.  
Note: For devices with the CMOS clock input option, the CKI2 pin should be connected to VSSA.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
29  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
SIO1DIS: This is a powerdown signal to the SIO1 I/O  
unit. It disables the clock input to the unit, thus eliminat-  
ing any sleep power associated with the SIO1. Since  
the gating of the clocks may result in incomplete trans-  
actions, it is recommended that this option be used in  
applications where the SIO1 is not used or when reset  
may be used to reenable the SIO1 unit. Otherwise, the  
first transaction after reenabling the unit may be corrupt-  
ed.  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
4.13 Power Management  
There are three different control mechanisms for putting  
the DSP1629 into low-power modes: the powerc control  
register, the STOP pin, and the AWAIT bit in the alf reg-  
ister. The PLL can also be disabled with the PLLEN bit  
of the pllc register for more power saving.  
SIO2DIS: This bit powers down the SIO2 in the same  
way SIO1DIS powers down the SIO1.  
Powerc Control Register Bits  
The powerc register has 10 bits that power down vari-  
ous portions of the chip and select the clock source:  
PHIFDIS: This is a powerdown signal to the parallel  
host interface. It disables the clock input to the unit, thus  
eliminating any sleep power associated with the PHIF.  
Since the gating of the clocks may result in incomplete  
transactions, it is recommended that this option be used  
in applications where the PHIF is not used, or when re-  
set may be used to reenable the PHIF. Otherwise, the  
first transaction after reenabling the unit may be corrupt-  
ed.  
XTLOFF: Assertion of the XTLOFF bit powers down the  
small-signal input circuit, disabling the internal proces-  
sor clock. Since the small-signal input circuit takes  
many cycles to stabilize, care must be taken with the  
turn-on sequence, as described later.  
SLOWCKI: Assertion of the SLOWCKI bit selects the  
ring oscillator as the clock source for the internal pro-  
cessor clock instead of CKI or the PLL. When CKI or the  
PLL is selected, the ring oscillator is powered down.  
Switching of the clocks is synchronized so that no par-  
tial or short clock pulses occur. Two nops should follow  
the instruction that sets or clears SLOWCKI.  
TIMERDIS: This is a timer disable signal which disables  
the clock input to the timer unit. Its function is identical  
to the DISABLE field of the timerc control register. Writ-  
ing a 0 to the TIMERDIS field will continue the timer op-  
eration.  
Figure 8, Power Management Using the powerc and the  
pllc Registers, shows a functional view of the effect of  
the bits of the powerc register on the clock circuitry. It  
shows only the high-level operation of each bit. Not  
shown are the bits that power down the peripheral units.  
NOCK: Assertion of the NOCK bit synchronously turns  
off the internal processor clock, regardless of whether  
its source is provided by CKI, the PLL, or the ring oscil-  
lator. The NOCK bit can be cleared by resetting the chip  
with the RSTB pin, or asserting the INT0 or INT1 pins.  
Two nops should follow the instruction that sets NOCK.  
The PLL remains running, if enabled, while NOCK is  
set.  
STOP Pin  
Assertion (active-low) of the STOP pin has the same ef-  
fect as setting the NOCK bit in the powerc register. The  
internal processor clock is synchronously disabled until  
the STOP pin is returned high. Once the STOP pin is re-  
turned high, program execution will continue from  
where it left off without any loss of state. No chip reset  
is required. The PLL remains running, if enabled, during  
STOP assertion.  
INT0EN: This bit allows the INT0 pin to asynchronously  
clear the NOCK bit, thereby allowing the device to con-  
tinue program execution from where it left off without  
any loss of state. No chip reset is required. It is recom-  
mended that, when INT0EN is to be used, the INT0  
interrupt be disabled in the inc register so that an unin-  
tended interrupt does not occur. After the program re-  
sumes, the INT0 interrupt in the ins register should be  
cleared.  
The pllc Register Bits  
INT1EN: This bit enables the INT1 pin to be used as the  
NOCK clear, exactly like INT0EN, previously described.  
The PLLEN bit of the pllc register can be used to power  
down the clock synthesizer circuitry. Before shutting  
down the clock synthesizer circuitry, the system clock  
should be switched to either CKI using the PLLSEL bit  
of pllc, or to the ring oscillator using the SLOWCKI bit of  
powerc.  
The following control bits power down the peripheral  
I/O units of the DSP. These bits can be used to further  
reduce the power consumption during standard sleep  
mode.  
30  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
PLLEN  
XTLOFF  
OFF  
DEEP  
SLEEP  
ON  
RING  
OSCILLATOR  
CKI2  
SMALL SIGNAL  
CLOCK  
fSLOW CLOCK  
fVCO/2  
PLL  
MASK-PROGRAMMABLE  
CKI  
OPTION  
fCKI  
CMOS  
INPUT  
CLOCK  
SYNC.  
MUX  
PLLSEL  
SLOWCKI  
STOP  
HW STOP  
DEEP  
SLEEP  
SW STOP  
NOCK  
SYNC.  
GATE  
DISABLE  
CLEAR NOCK  
RSTB  
fINTERNAL CLOCK  
INT0  
INTERNAL  
PROCESSOR  
CLOCK  
INT0EN  
INT1  
INT1EN  
5-4124 (F).h  
Notes:  
The functions in the shaded ovals are bits in the powerc control register. The functions in the nonshaded ovals are bits in the pllc control register.  
Deep sleep is the state arrived at either by a hardware or software stop of the internal processor clock.  
The switching of the multiplexers and the synchronous gate is designed so that no partial clocks or glitching will occur.  
When the deep sleep state is entered with the ring oscillator selected, the internal processor clock is turned off before the ring oscillator is pow-  
ered down.  
PLL select is the PLLSEL bit of pllc; PLL powerdown is the PLLEN bit of pllc.  
Figure 8. Power Management Using the powerc and the pllc Registers  
Agere Systems Inc.  
31  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Two scenarios exist here:  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
1. Immediate Turn-Off, Turn-On with RSTB: This sce-  
nario applies to situations where the target device is  
not required to execute any code while the small-sig-  
nal input circuit is powered down, and where restart  
from a reset state can be tolerated. In this case, the  
processor clock derived from either the oscillator or  
the small-signal input is running when XTLOFF is as-  
serted. This effectively stops the internal processor  
clock. When the system chooses to reenable the os-  
cillator or small-signal input, a reset of the device will  
be required. The reset pulse must be of sufficient du-  
ration for the small-signal start-up interval to be sat-  
isfied (required for the small-signal input circuit to  
reach its dc operating point). A minimum reset pulse  
of 20 µs will be adequate. The falling edge of the re-  
set signal, RSTB, will asynchronously clear the  
XTLOFF field, thus reenabling the power to the  
small-signal circuitry. The target DSP will then start  
execution from a reset state, following the rising  
edge of RSTB.  
Await Bit of the alf Register  
Setting the AWAIT bit of the alf register causes the pro-  
cessor to go into the standard sleep state or power-sav-  
ing standby mode. Operation of the AWAIT bit is the  
same as in the DSP1610, DSP1611, DSP1616,  
DSP1617, and DSP1618. In this mode, the minimum  
circuitry required to process an incoming interrupt re-  
mains active, and the PLL remains active if enabled. An  
interrupt will return the processor to the previous state,  
and program execution will continue. The action result-  
ing from setting the AWAIT bit and the action resulting  
from setting bits in the powerc register are mostly inde-  
pendent. As long as the processor is receiving a clock,  
whether slow or fast, the DSP may be put into standard  
sleep mode with the AWAIT bit. Once the AWAIT bit is  
set, the STOP pin can be used to stop and later restart  
the processor clock, returning to the standard sleep  
state. If the processor clock is not running, however, the  
AWAIT bit cannot be set.  
2. Running from Slow Clock While XTLOFF Active: The  
second scenario applies to situations where the de-  
vice needs to continue execution of its target code.  
In this case, the device switches to the slow ring os-  
cillator clock first by enabling the SLOWCKI field.  
Then, if the small-signal input is being used, power  
down this circuitry by writing a 1 to the XTLOFF field.  
Two nops are needed in between the two write oper-  
ations to the powerc register. The target device will  
then continue execution of its code at slow speed,  
while the small-signal input clock is turned off.  
Switching from the slow clock back to the high-speed  
clock is then accomplished in three user steps. First,  
XTLOFF is cleared. Then, a user-programmed rou-  
tine sets the internal timer to a delay to wait for the  
small-signal input oscillations to become stable.  
When the timer counts down to zero, the high-speed  
clock is selected by clearing the SLOWCKI field, ei-  
ther in the timer's interrupt service routine or follow-  
ing a timer polling loop. If PLL operation is desired,  
then an additional routine is necessary to enable the  
PLL and wait for it to lock.  
Power Management Sequencing  
There are important considerations for sequencing the  
power management modes. The small-signal clock in-  
put circuit has a start-up delay which must be taken into  
account, and the PLL requires a delay to reach lock-in.  
Also, the chip may or may not need to be reset following  
a return from a low-power state.  
Devices with a small-signal input clocking option may  
use the XTLOFF bit in the powerc register to power  
down the on-chip oscillator or small-signal circuitry,  
thereby reducing the power dissipation. When reen-  
abling the oscillator or the small-signal circuitry, it is im-  
portant to bear in mind that a start-up interval exists,  
during which time the clocks are not stable.  
32  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Power Management Examples Without the PLL  
The following examples show the more significant options for reducing the power dissipation. These are valid only  
if the pllc register is set to disable and deselect the PLL (PLLEN = 0, PLLSEL = 0).  
Standard Sleep Mode. This is the standard sleep mode. While the processor is clocked with a high-speed clock,  
CKI, the alf register's AWAIT bit is set. Peripheral units may be turned off to further reduce the sleep power.  
powerc = 0X00F0  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
/* Turn off peripherals, core running with CKI */  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
cont: .  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Only sleep power */  
/* consumed here until.... interrupt wakes up the device */  
/* User code executes here */  
.
.
powerc = 0x0  
/* Turn peripheral units back on */  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock. In this case, the ring oscillator is selected to clock the processor before the device  
is put to sleep. This will reduce the power dissipation while waiting for an interrupt to continue program execution.  
powerc = 0x40F0  
2*nop  
/* Turn off peripherals and select slow clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
cont: .  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Reduced sleep power */  
/* consumed here.... Interrupt wakes up the device */  
/* User code executes here */  
.
.
powerc = 0x00F0  
2*nop  
/* Select high-speed clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0x0000  
/* Turn peripheral units back on */  
Note that, in this case, the wake-up latency is determined by the period of the ring oscillator clock.  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock and Small-Signal Disabled. If the target device contains the small-signal clock  
option, the clock input circuitry can be powered down to further reduce power. In this case, the slow clock must be  
selected first.  
powerc = 0x40F0  
2*nop  
/* Turn off peripherals and select slow clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0xC0F0  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
/* Turn off the small-signal input buffer */  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Reduced sleep power */  
/* consumed here.... Interrupt wakes up the device */  
/* Clear XTLOFF, reenable small-signal */  
/* Wait until small-signal is stable */  
/* Select high-speed clock */  
powerc = 0x40F0  
call xtlwait  
cont: powerc = 0x00F0  
2*nop  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0x0000  
/* Turn peripheral units back on */  
Note that, in this case, the wake-up latency is dominated by the small-signal start-up period.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
33  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Software Stop. In this case, all internal clocking is disabled. INT0, INT1, or RSTB may be used to reenable the  
clocks.The power management must be done in correct sequence.  
powerc = 0x4000  
2*nop  
/* SLOWCKI asserted */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0xD000  
inc = NOINT0  
/* XTLOFF asserted if applicable and INT0EN asserted */  
/* Disable the INT0 interrupt */  
sopor:powerc = 0xF000  
/* NOCK asserted, all clocks stop */  
/* Minimum switching power consumed here */  
/* Some nops will be needed */  
3*nop  
/* INT0 pin clears the NOCK field, clocking resumes */  
/* INT0EN cleared and XTLOFF cleared, if applicable*/  
/* Wait for the small-signal to */  
cont: powerc = 0x4000  
call waitxtl  
/* stabilize, if applicable*/  
powerc = 0x0  
2*nop  
/* Clear SLOWCKI field, back to high speed */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
ins = 0x0010  
/* Clear the INT0 status bit */  
In this case also, the wake-up latency is dominated by the small-signal start-up period.  
The previous examples do not provide an exhaustive list of options available to the user. Many different clocking  
possibilities exist for which the target device may be programmed, depending on:  
The clock source to the processor.  
Whether the user chooses to power down the peripheral units.  
The operational state of the small-signal clock input, powered or unpowered.  
Whether the internal processor clock is disabled through hardware or software.  
The combination of power management modes the user chooses.  
Whether or not the PLL is enabled.  
An example subroutine for xtlwait follows:  
xtlwait:  
timer0 = 0x2710  
timerc = 0x0010  
inc = 0x0000  
a0 = ins  
/* Load a count of 10,000 into the timer */  
/* Start the timer with a PRESCALE of two */  
/* Disable the interrupts  
/* Poll the ins register  
*/  
*/  
loop1:  
a0 = a0 & 0x0100 /* Check bit 8 (TIME) of the ins register */  
if eq goto loop1 /* Loop if the bit is not set  
*/  
*/  
*/  
ins = 0x0100  
return  
/* Clear the TIME interrupt bit  
/* Return to the main program  
34  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Power Management Examples with the PLL  
The following examples show the more significant options for reducing power dissipation if operation with the PLL  
clock synthesizer is desired.  
Standard Sleep Mode, PLL Running. This mode would be entered in the same manner as without the PLL. While  
the input to the clock synthesizer, CKI, remains running, the alf register's AWAIT bit is set. The PLL will continue to  
run and dissipate power. Peripheral units may be turned off to further reduce the sleep power.  
powerc = 0x00F0  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
/* Turn off peripherals, core running with PLL */  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Only sleep power plus PLL */  
/* power consumed here.... Interrupt wakes up the device */  
/* User code executes here */  
cont: . . .  
powerc = 0x0  
/* Turn peripheral units back on */  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock, PLL Running. In this case, the ring oscillator is selected to clock the processor  
before the device is put to sleep. This will reduce power dissipation while waiting for an interrupt to continue program  
execution.  
powerc = 0x40F0  
2*nop  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
/* Turn off peripherals and select slow clock */  
/* Wait for slow clock to take effect */  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Reduced sleep power, PLL */  
/* power, and ring oscillator power consumed here... */  
/* Interrupt wakes up the device */  
cont: . . .  
/* User code executes here */  
powerc = 0x00F0  
2*nop  
/* Select high-speed PLL based clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0x0000  
/* Turn peripheral units back on */  
Agere Systems Inc.  
35  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock and Small-Signal Disabled, PLL Disabled. If the target device contains the small-  
signal clock option, the clock input circuitry can be powered down to further reduce power. In this case, the slow  
clock must be selected first, and then the PLL must be disabled, since the PLL cannot run without the clock input  
circuitry being active.  
powerc = 0x40F0  
2*nop  
pllc = 0x29F2  
powerc = 0xC0F0  
/* Turn off peripherals and select slow clock */  
/* Wait for slow clock to take effect */  
/* Disable PLL (assume N = 1,M = 20, LF = 1001) */  
/* Disable small-signal input buffer */  
/* Set alf register in cache loop if running from */  
/* external memory with >1 wait state */  
/* Stop internal processor clock, interrupt circuits */  
/* active */  
sleep:a0 = 0x8000  
do 1 {  
alf = a0  
nop  
}
nop  
nop  
/* Needed for bedtime execution. Reduced sleep power  
/* consumed here.... Interrupt wakes up device */  
/* Clear XTLOFF, leave PLL disabled */  
/* Wait until small-signal is stable */  
/* Enable PLL, continue to run off slow clock */  
/* Loop to check for LOCK flag assertion */  
/* Select high-speed PLL based clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
powerc = 0x40F0  
call xtlwait  
pllc = 0xE9F2  
call pllwait  
cont: powerc = 0x00F0  
2*nop  
powerc = 0x0000  
/* Turn peripherals back on */  
Software Stop, PLL Disabled. In this case, all internal clocking is disabled. INT0, INT1, or RSTB may be used to  
reenable the clocks. The power management must be done in the correct sequence, with the PLL being disabled  
before shutting down the clock input buffer.  
powerc = 0x4000  
2*nop  
pllc = 0x29F2  
powerc = 0xD000  
/* SLOWCKI asserted */  
/* Wait for slow clock to take effect */  
/* Disable PLL (assume N = 1, M = 20, LF = 1001) */  
/* XTLOFF asserted, if applicable and INT0EN  
/* asserted */  
sopor:powerc = 0xF000  
3*nop  
/* NOCK asserted, all clocks stop */  
/* Minimum switching power consumed here */  
/* Some nops will be needed */  
/* INT0 pin clears NOCK field, clocking resumes */  
/* INTOEN cleared and XTLOFF cleared, if applicable */  
/* Wait until small-signal is stable */  
/* if applicable */  
cont: powerc = 0x4000  
call xtlwait  
pllc = 0xE9F2  
call pllwait  
powerc = 0x0  
2*nop  
/* Enable PLL, continue to run off slow clock */  
/* Loop to check for LOCK flag assertion */  
/* Select high-speed PLL based clock */  
/* Wait for it to take effect */  
ins = 0x0010  
/ * Clear the INT0 status bit */  
36  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Multiply/ALU Instructions  
5 Software Architecture  
Note that the function statements and transfer state-  
ments in Table 13, Multiply/ALU Instructions, are cho-  
sen independently. Any function statement (F1) can be  
combined with any transfer statement to form a valid  
multiply/ALU instruction. If either statement is not re-  
quired, a single statement from either column also con-  
stitutes a valid instruction. The number of cycles to  
execute the instruction is a function of the transfer col-  
umn. (An instruction with no transfer statement exe-  
cutes in one instruction cycle.) Whenever PC, pt, or rM  
is used in the instruction and points to external memory,  
the programmed number of wait-states must be added  
to the instruction cycle count. All multiply/ALU instruc-  
tions require one word of program memory. The no-op-  
eration (nop) instruction is a special-case encoding of a  
multiply/ALU instruction and executes in one cycle. The  
assembly-language representation of a nop is either  
nop or a single semicolon.  
5.1 Instruction Set  
The DSP1629 processor has seven types of instruc-  
tions: multiply/ALU, special function, control, F3 ALU,  
BMU, cache, and data move. The multiply/ALU instruc-  
tions are the primary instructions used to implement sig-  
nal processing algorithms. Statements from this group  
can be combined to generate multiply/accumulate, log-  
ical, and other ALU functions and to transfer data be-  
tween memory and registers in the data arithmetic unit.  
The special function instructions can be conditionally  
executed based on flags from the previous ALU or BMU  
operation, the condition of one of the counters, or the  
value of a pseudorandom bit in the DSP1629 device.  
Special function instructions perform shift, round, and  
complement functions. The F3 ALU instructions enrich  
the operations available on accumulators. The BMU in-  
structions provide high-performance bit manipulation.  
The control instructions implement the goto and call  
commands. Control instructions can also be executed  
conditionally. Cache instructions are used to implement  
low-overhead loops, conserve program memory, and  
decrease the execution time of certain multiply/ALU in-  
structions. Data move instructions are used to transfer  
data between memory and registers or between accu-  
mulators and registers. See the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/  
29 Digital Signal Processor Information Manual for a de-  
tailed description of the instruction set.  
A single-cycle squaring function is provided in  
DSP1629. By setting the X = Y = bit in the auc register,  
any instruction that loads the high half of the y register  
also loads the x register with the same value. A subse-  
quent instruction to multiply the x register and y register  
results in the square of the value being placed in the p  
register. The instruction a0 = p p = x*y y = *r0++ with  
the X = Y = bit set to one will read the value pointed to  
by r0, load it to both x and y, multiply the previously  
fetched value of x and y, and transfer the previous prod-  
uct to a0. A table of values pointed to by r0 can thus be  
squared in a pipeline with one instruction cycle per each  
value. Multiply/ALU instructions that use x = X transfer  
statements (such as a0 = p p = x*y y = *r0++ x = *pt++)  
are not recommended for squaring because pt will be  
incremented even though x is not loaded from the value  
pointed to by pt. Also, the same conflict wait occurs from  
reading the same bank of internal memory or reading  
from external memory apply, since the X space fetch  
occurs (even though its value is not used).  
The following operators are used in describing the in-  
struction set:  
*  
16 x 16-bit –> 32-bit multiplication or register-  
indirect addressing when used as a prefix to an  
address register or denotes direct addressing  
when used as a prefix to an immediate  
+  
36-bit addition†  
–  
36-bit subtraction†  
Arithmetic right shift  
>>  
>>> Logical right shift  
<< Arithmetic left shift  
<<< Logical left shift  
|  
36-bit bitwise OR†  
&  
36-bit bitwise AND†  
^  
:  
36-bit bitwise EXCLUSIVE OR†  
Compound address swapping, accumulator  
shuffling  
~  
One's complement  
These are 36-bit operations. One operand is 36-bit data in an ac-  
cumulator; the other operand may be 16 bits, 32 bits, or 36 bits.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
37  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 13. Multiply/ALU Instructions  
Function Statement  
Transfer Statement†  
Cycles (Out/In Cache)‡  
p = x y  
y = Y  
x = X  
x = X  
2/1  
2/1  
1/1  
1/1  
*
aD = p  
p = x y  
y = aT  
*
aD = aS + p  
aD = aS – p  
p = x y  
y[l] = Y  
*
p = x y  
aT[l] = Y  
*
aD = p  
x = Y  
Y
1/1  
1/1  
2/2  
2/2  
2/2  
2/2  
2/2  
aD = aS + p  
aD = aS – p  
aD = y  
Y = y[l]  
Y = aT[l]  
aD = aS + y  
aD = aS – y  
aD = aS & y  
aD = aS | y  
aD = aS ^ y  
aS – y  
Z:y  
x = X  
Z:y[l]  
Z:aT[l]  
aS & y  
† The l in [ ] is an optional argument that specifies the low 16 bits of aT or y.  
‡ Add cycles for:  
1. When an external memory access is made in X or Y space and wait-states are programmed, add the number of wait-states.  
2. If an X-space access and a Y-space access are made to the same bank of DPRAM in one instruction, add one cycle.  
Note: For transfer statements when loading the upper half of an accumulator, the lower half is cleared if the corre-  
sponding CLR bit in the auc register is zero. auc is cleared by reset.  
Table 14. Replacement Table for Multiply/ALU Instructions  
Replace  
aD, aS, aT  
X
Value  
a0, a1  
Meaning  
One of two DAU accumulators.  
*pt++, *pt++i  
X memory space location pointed to by pt. pt is postmodified by +1 and  
i, respectively.  
Y
Z
*rM, *rM++, *rM--, rM++j  
RAM location pointed to by rM (M = 0, 1, 2, 3). rM is postmodified by  
0, +1, –1, or j, respectively.  
*rMzp, *rMpz, *rMm2, *rMjk Read/write compound addressing. rM (M = 0, 1, 2, 3) is used twice.  
First, postmodified by 0, +1, –1, or j, respectively; and, second, post-  
modified by +1, 0, +2, or k, respectively.  
38  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Special Function Instructions  
All forms of the special function require one word of program memory and execute in one instruction cycle. (If PC  
points to external memory, add programmed wait-states.)  
aD = aS >> 1  
aD = aS >> 4  
aD = aS >> 8  
aD = aS >> 16  
}
Arithmetic right shift (sign preserved) of 36-bit accumulators  
aD = aS  
Load destination accumulator from source accumulator  
2's complement  
aD = –aS  
aD = ~aS*  
1's complement  
aD = rnd(aS) Round upper 20 bits of accumulator  
aDh = aSh + 1 Increment upper half of accumulator (lower half cleared)  
aD = aS + 1  
aD = y  
Increment accumulator  
Load accumulator with 32-bit y register value with sign extend  
Load accumulator with 32-bit p register value with sign extend  
aD = p  
aD = aS << 1  
}
aD = aS << 4  
aD = aS << 8  
aD = aS << 16  
Arithmetic left shift (sign not preserved) of the lower 32 bits of accumulators  
(upper 4 bits are sign-bit-extended from bit 31 at the completion of the shift)  
The above special functions can be conditionally executed, as in:  
if CON instruction  
and with an event counter:  
ifc CON instruction  
which means:  
if CON is true then  
c1 = c1 + 1  
instruction  
c2 = c1  
else  
c1 = c1 + 1  
The above special function statements can be executed unconditionally by writing them directly, e.g., a0 = a1.  
Table 15. Replacement Table for Special Function Instructions  
Replace  
aD  
Value  
a0, a1  
Meaning  
One of two DAU accumulators.  
aS  
CON  
mi, pl, eq, ne, gt, le, lvs, lvc, mvs, mvc, c0ge,  
See Table 17, DSP1629 Conditional Mne-  
c0lt, c1ge, c1lt, heads, tails, true, false, allt, allf, monics, for definitions of mnemonics.  
somet, somef, oddp, evenp, mns1, nmns1, npint,  
njint, lock  
*
This function is not available for the DSP16A.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
39  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Control Instructions  
All control instructions executed unconditionally execute in two cycles, except icall, which takes three cycles. Control  
instructions executed conditionally execute in three instruction cycles. (If PC, pt, or pr point to external memory, add  
programmed wait-states.) Control instructions executed unconditionally require one word of program memory, while  
control instructions executed conditionally require two words. Control instructions cannot be executed from the  
cache.  
goto JA†  
goto pt  
call JA†  
call pt  
icall‡  
return  
ireturn  
(goto pr)  
(goto pi)  
The goto JA and call JA instructions should not be placed in the last or next-to-last instruction before the boundary of a 4 Kwords page. If  
the goto or call is placed there, the program counter will have incremented to the next page and the jump will be to the next page, rather than  
to the desired current page.  
The icall instruction is reserved for development system use.  
The above control instructions, with the exception of ireturn and icall, can be conditionally executed. For example:  
if le goto 0x0345  
Table 16. Replacement Table for Control Instructions  
Replace  
Value  
Meaning  
CON  
mi, pl, eq, ne, gt, le, nlvs, lvc, mvs, mvc, c0ge, c0lt, See Table 17, DSP1629 Conditional Mne-  
c1ge, c1lt, heads, tails, true, false, allt, allf, somet,  
somef, oddp, evenp, mns1, nmns1, npint, njint, lock  
monics, for definitions of mnemonics.  
JA  
12-bit value  
Least significant 12 bits of absolute address  
within the same 4 Kwords memory section.  
40  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Conditional Mnemonics (Flags)  
Table 17, DSP1629 Conditional Mnemonics, lists mnemonics used in conditional execution of special function and  
control instructions.  
Table 17. DSP1629 Conditional Mnemonics  
Test  
pl  
Meaning  
Result is nonnegative (sign bit is bit 35) (0).  
Result is equal to 0 (=0).  
Test  
mi  
Meaning  
Result is negative (<0).  
eq  
ne  
Result is not equal to 0 (≠0).  
Result is less than or equal to 0 (0).  
Logical overflow clear.  
gt  
Result is greater than 0 (>0).  
Logical overflow set.*  
Mathematical overflow set.†  
le  
lvs  
mvs  
lvc  
mvc  
c0lt  
c1lt  
tails  
false  
Mathematical overflow clear.  
Counter 0 less than 0.  
c0ge Counter 0 greater than or equal to 0.  
c1ge Counter 1 greater than or equal to 0.  
heads Pseudorandom sequence bit set.  
Counter 1 less than 0.  
Pseudorandom sequence bit clear.  
true  
The condition is always satisfied in an if in-  
struction.  
The condition is never satisfied in an if instruc-  
tion.  
allt  
All true, all BIO input bits tested compared  
successfully.  
allf  
All false, no BIO input bits tested compared  
successfully.  
somet Some true, some BIO input bits tested com-  
pared successfully.  
somef Some false, some BIO input bits tested did not  
compare successfully.  
oddp Odd parity, from BMU operation.  
mns1 Minus 1, result of BMU operation.  
evenp Even parity, from BMU operation.  
nmns1 Not minus 1, result of BMU operation.  
npint Not PINT, used by hardware development  
system.  
njint  
Not JINT, used by hardware development  
system.  
lock  
The PLL has achieved lock and is stable.  
* Result is not representable in the 36-bit accumulators (36-bit overflow).  
† Bits 35—31 are not the same (32-bit overflow).  
Notes:  
Testing the state of the counters (c0 or c1) automatically increments the counter by one.  
The heads or tails condition is determined by a randomly set or cleared bit, respectively. The bit is randomly set with a probability of 0.5. A random  
rounding function can be implemented with either heads or tails. The random bit is generated by a ten-stage pseudorandom sequence generator  
(PSG) that is updated after either a heads or tails test. The pseudorandom sequence may be reset by writing any value to the pi register, except  
during an interrupt service routine (ISR). While in an ISR, writing to the pi register updates the register and does not reset the PSG. If not in an  
ISR, writing to the pi register resets the PSG. (The pi register is updated, but will be written with the contents of the PC on the next instruction.)  
Interrupts must be disabled when writing to the pi register. If an interrupt is taken after the pi write, but before pi is updated with the PC value,  
the ireturn instruction will not return to the correct location. If the RAND bit in the auc register is set, however, writing the pi register never resets  
the PSG.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
41  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
F3 ALU Instructions  
These instructions are implemented in the DSP1600 core. They allow accumulator two-operand operations with ei-  
ther another accumulator, the p register, or a 16-bit immediate operand (IM16). The result is placed in a destination  
accumulator that can be independently specified. All operations are done with the full 36 bits. For the accumulator  
with accumulator operations, both inputs are 36 bits. For the accumulator with p register operations, the p register  
is sign-extended into bits 35—32 before the operation. For the accumulator high with immediate operations, the im-  
mediate is sign-extended into bits 35—32 and the lower bits 15—0 are filled with zeros, except for the AND opera-  
tion, because they are filled with ones. These conventions allow the user to do operations with 32-bit immediates by  
programming two consecutive 16-bit immediate operations. The F3 ALU instructions are shown in Table 18, F3 ALU  
Instructions.  
Table 18. F3 ALU Instructions  
F3 ALU Instructions*  
Not Cacheable (Two-Cycle)†  
Cacheable (One-Cycle)  
aD = aS + aT  
aD = aS – aT  
aD = aS & aT  
aD = aS | aT  
aD = aS ^ aT  
aS – aT  
aD = aSh + IM16  
aD = aSh – IM16  
aD = aSh & IM16  
aD = aSh | IM16  
aD = aSh ^ IM16  
aSh – IM16  
aS & aT  
aSh & IM16  
aD = aS + p  
aD = aS – p  
aD = aS & p  
aD = aS | p  
aD = aS ^ p  
aS – p  
aD = aSl + IM16  
aD = aSl – IM16  
aD = aSl & IM16  
aD = aSl | IM16  
aD = aSl ^ IM16  
aSl – IM16  
aS & p  
aSl & IM16  
*
If PC points to external memory, add programmed wait-states.  
The h and l are required notation in these instructions.  
Note: The F3 ALU instructions that do not have a destination accumulator are used to set flags for conditional operations, i.e., bit test operations.  
F4 BMU Instructions  
The bit manipulation unit in the DSP1629 provides a set of efficient bit manipulation operations on accumulators. It  
contains four auxiliary registers, ar<0—3> (arM, M = 0, 1, 2, 3), two alternate accumulators (aa0—aa1), which can  
be shuffled with the working set, and four flags (oddp, evenp, mns1, and nmns1). The flags are testable by condi-  
tional instructions and can be read and written via bits 4—7 of the alf register. The BMU also sets the LMI, LEQ,  
LLV, and LMV flags in the psw register.  
LMI = 1 if negative (i.e., bit 35 = 1)  
LEQ = 1 if zero (i.e., bits 35—0 are 0)  
LLV = 1 if (a) 36-bit overflow, or if (b) illegal shift on field width/offset condition  
LMV = 1 if bits 31—35 are not the same (32-bit overflow)  
The BMU instructions and cycle times follow. (If PC points to external memory, add programmed wait-states.) All  
BMU instructions require 1 word of program memory unless otherwise noted. Please refer to the DSP1611/17/18/  
27/28/29 Digital Signal Processor Information Manual for further discussion of the BMU instructions.  
42  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Barrel Shifter:  
aD = aS >> IM16  
aD = aS >> arM  
aD = aS >> aS  
Arithmetic right shift by immediate (36-bit, sign filled in); 2-cycle, 2-word.  
Arithmetic right shift by arM (36-bit, sign filled in); 1-cycle.  
Arithmetic right shift by aS (36-bit, sign filled in); 2-cycle.  
aD = aS >>> IM16  
aD = aS >>> arM  
aD = aS >>> aS  
Logical right shift by immediate (32-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle, 2-word.  
Logical right shift by arM (32-bit shift, 0s filled in); 1-cycle.  
Logical right shift by aS (32-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle.  
aD = aS << IM16  
aD = aS << arM  
aD = aS << aS  
Arithmetic left shiftby immediate (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle, 2-word.  
Arithmetic left shiftby arM (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 1-cycle.  
Arithmetic left shiftby aS (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle.  
aD = aS <<< IM16  
aD = aS <<< arM  
aD = aS <<< aS  
Logical left shift by immediate (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle, 2-word.  
Logical left shift by arM (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 1-cycle.  
Logical left shift by aS (36-bit shift, 0s filled in); 2-cycle.  
Not the same as the special function arithmetic left shift. Here, the guard bits in the destination accumulator are shifted into, not sign-extended.  
Normalization and Exponent Computation:  
aD = exp(aS)  
Detect the number of redundant sign bits in accumulator; 1-cycle.  
aD = norm(aS, arM)  
Normalize aS with respect to bit 31, with exponent in arM; 1-cycle.  
Bit Field Extraction and Insertion:  
aD = extracts(aS, IM16) Extraction with sign extension, field specified as immediate; 2-cycle, 2-word.  
aD = extracts(aS, arM) Extraction with sign extension, field specified in arM; 1-cycle.  
aD = extractz(aS, IM16) Extraction with zero extension, field specified as immediate; 2-cycle, 2-word.  
aD = extractz(aS, arM) Extraction with zero extension, field specified in arM; 1-cycle.  
aD = insert(aS, IM16) Bit field insertion, field specified as immediate; 2-cycle, 2-word.  
aD = insert(aS, arM)  
Bit field insertion, field specified in arM; 2-cycle.  
Note: The bit field to be inserted or extracted is specified as follows. The width (in bits) of the field is the upper byte  
of the operand (immediate or arM), and the offset from the LSB is in the lower byte.  
Alternate Accumulator Set:  
aD = aS:aa0  
Shuffle accumulators with alternate accumulator 0 (aa0); 1-cycle.  
aD = aS:aa1  
Shuffle accumulators with alternate accumulator 1 (aa1); 1-cycle.  
Note: The alternate accumulator gets what was in aS. aD gets what was in the alternate accumulator.  
Table 19. Replacement Table for F3 ALU Instructions and F4 BMU Instructions  
Replace  
aD, aT, aS  
IM16  
Value  
Meaning  
One of the two accumulators.  
a0 or a1  
immediate  
ar<0—3>  
16-bit data, sign-, zero-, or one-extended as appropriate.  
One of the auxiliary BMU registers.  
arM  
Agere Systems Inc.  
43  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Cache Instructions  
Cache instructions require one word of program memory. The do instruction executes in one instruction cycle, and  
the redo instruction executes in two instruction cycles. (If PC points to external memory, add programmed wait-  
states.) Control instructions and long immediate values cannot be stored inside the cache. The instruction formats  
are as follows:  
do K {  
instr1  
instr2  
.  
.  
.  
instrN  
}  
redo K  
Table 20. Replacement Table for Cache Instructions  
Replace  
Instruction  
Encoding  
Meaning  
cloop†  
K
Number of times the instructions are to be executed taken from bits 0—6 of the cloop  
register.  
1 to 127  
1 to 15  
Number of times the instructions to be executed are encoded in the instruction.  
1 to 15 instructions can be included.  
N
† The assembly-language statement, do cloop (or redo cloop), is used to specify that the number of iterations is to be taken from the cloop  
register. K is encoded as 0 in the instruction encoding to select cloop.  
When the cache is used to execute a block of instructions, the cycle timings of the instructions are as follows:  
1. In the first pass, the instructions are fetched from program memory and the cycle times are the normal out-of-  
cache values, except for the last instruction in the block of N instructions. This instruction executes in two cycles.  
2. During pass two through pass K – 1, each instruction is fetched from cache and the in-cache timings apply.  
3. During the last (Kth) pass, the block of instructions is fetched from cache and the in-cache timings apply, except  
that the timing of the last instruction is the same as if it were out-of-cache.  
4. If any of the instructions access external memory, programmed wait-states must be added to the cycle counts.  
The redo instruction treats the instructions currently in the cache memory as another loop to be executed K times.  
Using the redo instruction, instructions are reexecuted from the cache without reloading the cache.  
The number of iterations, K, for a do or redo can be set at run time by first moving the number of iterations into the  
cloop register (7 bits unsigned), and then issuing the do cloop or redo cloop. At the completion of the loop, the  
value of cloop is decremented to 0; hence, cloop needs to be written before each do cloop or redo cloop.  
44  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Data Move Instructions  
Data move instructions normally execute in two instruction cycles. (If PC or rM point to external memory, any pro-  
grammed wait-states must be added. In addition, if PC and rM point to the same bank of DPRAM, then one cycle  
must be added.) Immediate data move instructions require two words of program memory; all other data move in-  
structions require only one word. The only exception to these statements is a special case immediate load (short  
immediate) instruction. If a YAAU register is loaded with a 9-bit short immediate value, the instruction requires only  
one word of memory and executes in one instruction cycle. All data move instructions, except those doing long im-  
mediate loads, can be executed from within the cache. The data move instructions are as follows:  
R = IM16  
aT[l] = R  
SR = IM9  
Y = R  
R = Y  
Z:R  
R = aS[l]  
DR = *(OFFSET)  
(OFFSET) = DR  
Table 21. Replacement Table for Data Move Instructions  
Replace  
Value  
Meaning  
R
Any of the registers in Table 51,  
R Field  
DR  
r<0—3>, a0[l], a1[l], y[l], p, pl, x, Subset of registers accessible with direct addressing.  
pt, pr, psw  
aS, aT  
a0, a1  
rM, rM++, rM--, rM++j  
High half of accumulator.  
Y
Z
Same as in multiply/ALU instructions.  
Same as in multiply/ALU instructions.  
*
*
*
*
rMzp, rMpz, rMm2, rMjk  
*
*
*
*
IM16  
IM9  
16-bit value  
9-bit value  
Long immediate data.  
Short immediate data for YAAU registers.  
OFFSET  
5-bit value from instruction  
11-bit value in base register  
Value in bits [15:5] of ybase register form the 11 most significant  
bits of the base address. The 5-bit offset is concatenated to this to  
form a 16-bit address.  
SR  
r<0—3>, rb, re, j, k  
Subset of registers for short immediate.  
Notes:  
sioc, sioc2, tdms, tdms2, srta, and srta2 registers are not readable.  
When signed registers less than 16 bits wide (c0, c1, c2) are read, their contents are sign-extended to 16 bits. When unsigned registers less than  
16 bits wide are read, their contents are zero-extended to 16 bits.  
Loading an accumulator with a data move instruction does not affect the flags.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
45  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
5.2 Register Settings  
Table 22, Serial I/O Control Registers, through Table 38, ioc Register, describe the programmable registers of the  
DSP1629 device. Table 40, Register Settings After Reset, describes the register settings after reset.  
Note that the following abbreviations are used in the tables:  
x = don't care  
R = read only  
W = read/write  
The reserved (RSVD) bits in the tables should always be written with zeros to make the program compatible with  
future chip versions.  
Table 22. Serial I/O Control Registers  
sioc  
Bit  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field DODLY  
LD  
CLK  
MSB  
OLD  
ILD  
OCK  
ICK  
OLEN ILEN  
Field  
DODLY  
Value  
Description  
DO changes on the rising edge of OCK.  
DO changes on the falling edge of OCK. This delay in driving DO increases the hold  
0
1
time on DO by half a cycle of OCK.  
In active mode, ILD1 and/or OLD1 = ICK1/16, active SYNC1 = ICK1/[128/256*].  
In active mode, ILD1 and/or OLD1 = OCK1/16, active SYNC1 = OCK1/[128/256*].  
Active clock = CKI/2 (1X).  
Active clock = CKI/6 (1X).  
Active clock = CKI/8 (1X).  
Active clock = CKI/10 (1X).  
LSB first.  
MSB first.  
OLD1 is an input (passive mode).  
OLD1 is an output (active mode).  
ILD1 is an input (passive mode).  
ILD1 is an output (active mode).  
OCK1 is an input (passive mode).  
OCK1 is an output (active mode).  
ICK1 is an input (passive mode).  
ICK1 is an output (active mode).  
16-bit output.  
LD  
0
1
CLK  
00  
01  
10  
11  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
MSB  
OLD  
ILD  
OCK  
ICK  
OLEN  
ILEN  
8-bit output.  
16-bit input.  
1
8-bit input.  
sioc2†  
Bit  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field DODLY2  
LD2  
CLK2  
MSB2  
OLD2  
ILD2  
OCK2  
ICK2 OLEN2 ILEN2  
* See tdms register, SYNC field.  
† The bit definitions of the sioc2 register are identical to the sioc register bit definitions.  
46  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 23. Time-Division Multiplex Slot Registers  
tdms  
Bit  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
SYNCSP  
MODE  
TRANSMIT SLOT  
SYNC  
Field  
Value  
Description  
0†  
SYNCSP*  
SYNC1 = ICK1/128 if LD = 0*.  
SYNC1 = OCK1/128 if LD = 1*.  
SYNC1 = ICK1/256 if LD = 0*.  
SYNC1 = OCK1/256 if LD = 1*.  
1
MODE  
0
Multiprocessor mode off; DOEN1 is an input (passive mode).  
Multiprocessor mode on; DOEN1 is an output (active mode).  
Transmit slot 7.  
1
TRANSMIT SLOT  
1xxxxxx  
x1xxxxx  
xx1xxxx  
xxx1xxx  
xxxx1xx  
xxxxx1x  
xxxxxx1  
1
Transmit slot 6.  
Transmit slot 5.  
Transmit slot 4.  
Transmit slot 3.  
Transmit slot 2.  
Transmit slot 1.  
SYNC  
Transmit slot 0, SYNC1 is an output (active mode).  
SYNC1 is an input (passive mode).  
0
tdms2‡  
Bit  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
*
MODE2  
TRANSMIT SLOT2  
SYNC2  
SYNCSP2  
* See sioc register, LD field.  
† Select this mode when in multiprocessor mode.  
‡ The tdms2 register bit definitions are identical to the tdms register bit definitions.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
47  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 24. Serial Receive/Transmit Address Registers  
srta  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
RECEIVE ADDRESS  
TRANSMIT ADDRESS  
Field  
Value  
Description  
RECEIVE ADDRESS  
1xxxxxxx  
x1xxxxxx  
xx1xxxxx  
xxx1xxxx  
xxxx1xxx  
xxxxx1xx  
xxxxxx1x  
xxxxxxx1  
Receive address 7.  
Receive address 6.  
Receive address 5.  
Receive address 4.  
Receive address 3.  
Receive address 2.  
Receive address 1.  
Receive address 0.  
Transmit address 7.  
Transmit address 6.  
Transmit address 5.  
Transmit address 4.  
Transmit address 3.  
Transmit address 2.  
Transmit address 1.  
Transmit address 0.  
TRANSMIT ADDRESS  
1xxxxxxx  
x1xxxxxx  
xx1xxxxx  
xxx1xxxx  
xxxx1xxx  
xxxxx1xx  
xxxxxx1x  
xxxxxxx1  
srta2*  
Bit  
Field  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RECEIVE ADDRESS2  
TRANSMIT ADDRESS2  
* The srta2 field definitions are identical to the srta register field definitions.  
Table 25. Multiprocessor Protocol Registers  
saddx  
Bit Field  
Write  
15—8  
7—0  
X
Write Protocol Field [7:0]  
0
Read  
Read Protocol Field [7:0]  
saddx2†  
Bit Field  
Write  
15—8  
7—0  
X
Write Protocol2 Field [7:0]  
0
Read  
Read Protocol2 Field [7:0]  
† The saddx2 field definitions are identical to the saddx register field definitions.  
48  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 26. Processor Status Word (psw) Register  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
X
10  
X
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
DAU FLAGS  
a1[V]  
a1[35:32]  
a0[V]  
a0[35:32]  
Field  
DAU FLAGS*  
Value  
Wxxx  
xWxx  
xxWx  
xxxW  
W
Description  
LMI—logical minus when set (bit 35 = 1).  
LEQ—logical equal when set (bit [35:0] = 0).  
LLV—logical overflow when set.  
LMV—mathematical overflow when set.  
Accumulator 1 (a1) overflow when set.  
Accumulator 1 (a1) bit 35.  
a1[V]  
a1[35:32]  
Wxxx  
xWxx  
xxWx  
xxxW  
W
Accumulator 1 (a1) bit 34.  
Accumulator 1 (a1) bit 33.  
Accumulator 1 (a1) bit 32.  
a0[V]  
Accumulator 0 (a0) overflow when set.  
Accumulator 0 (a0) bit 35.  
a0[35:32]  
Wxxx  
xWxx  
xxWx  
xxxW  
Accumulator 0 (a0) bit 34.  
Accumulator 0 (a0) bit 33.  
Accumulator 0 (a0) bit 32.  
* The DAU flags can be set by either BMU or DAU operations.  
Table 27. Arithmetic Unit Control (auc) Register†  
Bit  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
RAND  
X=Y=  
CLR  
SAT  
ALIGN  
Field  
Value  
Description  
RAND  
X=Y=  
CLR  
0
Pseudorandom sequence generator (PSG) reset by writing the pi  
register only outside an interrupt service routine.  
PSG never reset by writing the pi register.  
1
0
1
Normal operation.  
All instructions which load the high half of the y register also load  
the x register, allowing single-cycle squaring with p = x * y.  
1xx  
x1x  
xx1  
1x  
Clearing yl is disabled (enabled when 0).  
Clearing a1l is disabled (enabled when 0).  
Clearing a0l is disabled (enabled when 0).  
a1 saturation on overflow is disabled (enabled when 0).  
a0 saturation on overflow is disabled (enabled when 0).  
a0, a1 p.  
SAT  
x1  
ALIGN  
00  
01  
a0, a1 p/4.  
10  
a0, a1 p x 4 (and zeros written to the two LSBs).  
a0, a1 p x 2 (and zero written to the LSB).  
11  
† The auc is 9 bits [8:0]. The upper 7 bits [15:9] are always zero when read and should always be written with zeros to make the program  
compatible with future chip versions. The auc register is cleared at reset.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
49  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 28. Parallel Host Interface Control (phifc) Register  
Bit  
15—7  
RSVD  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
PSOBEF  
PFLAGSEL  
PFLAG  
PBSELF  
PSTRB  
PSTROBE  
PMODE  
Field  
Value  
Description  
PMODE  
PSTROBE  
PSTRB  
0
1
8-bit data transfers.  
16-bit data transfers.  
0
1
Intel protocol: PIDS and PODS data strobes.  
Motorola protocol: PRWN and PDS data strobes.  
0
1
When PSTROBE = 1, PODS pin (PDS) active-low.  
When PSTROBE = 1, PODS pin (PDS) active-high.  
PBSELF  
0
1
In either mode, PBSEL pin = 0 pdx0 low byte. See Table 7, PHIF Func-  
tion (8-bit and 16-bit Modes).  
If PMODE = 0, PBSEL pin = 1 pdx0 low byte.  
If PMODE = 1, PBSEL pin = 0 pdx0 high byte.  
PFLAG  
0
1
PIBF and POBE pins active-high.  
PIBF and POBE pins active-low.  
PFLAGSEL  
0
1
Normal.  
PIBF flag ORed with POBE flag and output on PIBF pin; POBE pin un-  
changed (output buffer empty).  
PSOBEF  
0
1
Normal.  
POBE flag as read through PSTAT register is active-low.  
Table 29. Interrupt Control (inc) Register  
Bit  
15  
14—11  
RSVD  
10  
9
8
7—6  
5—4  
3
2
1
0
Field  
JINT*  
OBE2  
IBF2  
TIME RSVD INT[1:0]  
PIBF  
POBE  
OBE  
IBF  
*
JINT is a JTAG interrupt and is controlled by the HDS. It may be made unmaskable by the Agere Systems development system tools.  
Encoding: a 0 disables an interrupt; a 1 enables an interrupt.  
Table 30. Interrupt Status (ins) Register  
Bit  
15  
14—11  
RSVD  
10  
9
8
7—6  
5—4  
3
2
1
0
Field  
JINT  
OBE2  
IBF2  
TIME RSVD  
INT[1:0]  
PIBF  
POBE  
OBE  
IBF  
Encoding: a 0 indicates no interrupt. A 1 indicates an interrupt has been recognized and is pending or being ser-  
viced. If a 1 is written to bits 4, 5, or 8 of ins, the corresponding interrupt is cleared.  
50  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 31. timerc Register  
Bit  
15—7  
RSVD  
6
5
4
3—0  
Field  
DISABLE  
RELOAD  
T0EN  
PRESCALE  
Field  
Value  
Description  
DISABLE  
RELOAD  
T0EN  
0
1
Timer enabled.  
Timer and prescaler disabled. The period register and timer0 are not reset.  
0
1
Timer stops after counting down to 0.  
Timer automatically reloads and repeats indefinitely.  
0
1
Timer holds current count.  
Timer counts down to 0.  
PRESCALE  
See the PRESCALE Field table.  
PRESCALE Field  
PRESCALE  
Frequency of  
PRESCALE  
Frequency of  
Timer Interrupts  
Timer Interrupts  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
CKO/2  
CKO/4  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
CKO/512  
CKO/1024  
CKO/2048  
CKO/4096  
CKO/8192  
CKO/16384  
CKO/32768  
CKO/65536  
CKO/8  
CKO/16  
CKO/32  
CKO/64  
CKO/128  
CKO/256  
Table 32. Phase-Locked Loop Control (pllc) Register  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
RSVD  
11—8  
7—5  
Nbits[2:0]  
4—0  
Field  
PLLEN  
PLLSEL  
ICP  
LF[3:0]  
Mbits[4:0]  
Field  
Value  
Description  
PLLEN  
PLLSEL  
ICP  
0
1
PLL powered down.  
PLL powered up.  
0
1
DSP internal clock taken directly from CKI.  
DSP internal clock taken from PLL.  
Charge pump current selection (see Table 64, PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Reg-  
ister Settings for proper value).  
RSVD  
0
LF[3:0]  
Loop filter setting (see Table 64, PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Register Settings  
for proper value).  
Nbits[2:0]  
Mbits[4:0]  
Encodes N, 1 N 8, where N = Nbits[2:0] + 2, unless Nbits[2:0] = 111, then N = 1.  
Encodes M, 2 M 20, where M = Mbits[4:0] + 2, fINTERNAL CLOCK = fCKI x (M/(2N)).  
Agere Systems Inc.  
51  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 33. sbit Register  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
DIREC[7:0]  
VALUE[7:0]  
Field  
DIREC  
Value  
Description  
1xxxxxxx  
x1xxxxxx  
xx1xxxxx  
xxx1xxxx  
xxxx1xxx  
xxxxx1xx  
xxxxxx1x  
xxxxxxx1  
Rxxxxxxx  
xRxxxxxx  
xxRxxxxx  
xxxRxxxx  
xxxxRxxx  
xxxxxRxx  
xxxxxxRx  
xxxxxxxR  
IOBIT7 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT6 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT5 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT4 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT3 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT2 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT1 is an output (input when 0).  
IOBIT0 is an output (input when 0).  
Reads the current value of IOBIT7.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT6.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT5.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT4.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT3.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT2.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT1.  
Reads the current value of IOBIT0.  
VALUE  
Table 34. cbit Register  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
MODE/MASK[3:0]  
MODE/MASK[n]  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Field  
MODE/MASK[7:4]  
DATA/PAT[7:4]  
DATA/PAT[3:0]  
DIREC[n]*  
DATA/PAT[n]  
Action  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
1 (Output)  
0 (Input)  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clear  
Set  
No Change  
Toggle  
No Test  
0 (Input)  
No Test  
0 (Input)  
Test for Zero  
Test for One  
0 (Input)  
* 0 n 7.  
52  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 35. alf Register  
Bit  
15  
14  
13—0  
Field  
AWAIT  
LOWPR  
FLAGS  
Field  
Value  
Action  
AWAIT  
LOWPR  
FLAGS  
1
0
Power-saving standby mode or standard sleep enabled.  
Normal operation.  
1
0
The internal DPRAM is addressed beginning at 0x0000 in X space.  
The internal DPRAM is addressed beginning at 0xc000 in X space.  
See the following table.  
Bit  
Flag  
Reserved  
nmns1  
mns1  
evenp  
oddp  
Use  
13—8  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NOT-MINUS-ONE from BMU  
MINUS-ONE from BMU  
EVEN PARITY from BMU  
ODD PARITY from BMU  
SOME FALSE from BIO  
SOME TRUE from BIO  
ALL FALSE from BIO  
ALL TRUE from BIO  
somef  
somet  
allf  
allt  
Table 36. mwait Register  
Bit  
15—12  
11—8  
ERAMHI[3:0]  
7—4  
3—0  
Field  
EROM[3:0]  
IO[3:0]  
ERAMLO[3:0]  
If the EXM pin is high and the INT1 is low upon reset, the mwait register is initialized to all 1s (15 wait-states for all  
external memory). Otherwise, the mwait register is initialized to all 0s (0 wait-states) upon reset.  
Table 37. DSP1629 32-Bit JTAG ID Register  
Bit  
31  
30  
29—28  
CLOCK  
27—19  
18—12  
11—0  
0x03B  
Field  
RSVD  
SECURE  
ROMCODE  
PART ID  
Field  
Value  
Mask-Programmable Features  
RSVD  
0
SECURE  
0
1
Nonsecure ROM option.  
Secure ROM option.  
CLOCK  
01  
11  
Small-signal input clock option.  
CMOS level input clock option.  
ROMCODE  
Users ROMCODE ID:  
The ROMCODE ID is the 9-bit binary value of the following expression:  
(20 x value for first letter) + (value of second letter), where the values of the let-  
ters are in the following table. For example, ROMCODE GK is (20 x 6) + (9) = 129  
or 0 1000 0001.  
PART ID  
0x29  
DSP1629.  
ROMCODE Letter  
Value  
A
0
B
C
2
D
3
E
4
F
5
G
6
H
7
J
K
9
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
W
Y
1
8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19  
Agere Systems Inc.  
53  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 38. ioc Register*  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8—7  
6—4  
3—0  
Field  
RSVD EXTROM CKO2 EBIOH WEROM ESIO2 SIOLBC CKO[1:0]  
RSVD DENB[3:0]  
* The field definitions for the ioc register are different from the DSP1610.  
ioc Fields  
ioc Field  
Description  
EXTROM  
CKO2  
If 1, sets AB15 low during external memory accesses when WEROM = 1.  
CKO configuration (see the following table).  
EBIOH  
If 1, enables the high half of BIO, IOBIT[4:7], and disables VEC[3:0] from pins.  
If 1, allows writing into external program (X) memory.  
If 1, enables SIO2 and low half of BIO, and disables PHIF from pins.  
If 1, DO1 and DO2 looped back to DI1 and DI2.  
CKO configuration (see the following table).  
If 1, delay EROM.  
WEROM  
ESIO2  
SIOLBC  
CKO[1:0]  
DENB3  
DENB2  
DENB1  
DENB0  
If 1, delay ERAMHI.  
If 1, delay IO.  
If 1, delay ERAMLO.  
CKO2  
CKO1  
CKO0  
CKO Output  
PLL  
CKI x M/(2N)  
Description  
Free-running clock.*,  
0
0
0
1X  
CKI  
Wait-stated clock.* †  
0
0
1
CKI/(1 + W) CKI x (M/(2N))/[1 + W]  
, ,  
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Held high.  
Held low.  
CKI  
CKI  
Output of CKI buffer.  
**  
*
CKI/(1 + W) CKI x (M/(2N))/[1 + W]  
Sequenced, wait-stated clock. , , ,  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
* The phase of CKI is synchronized by the rising edge of RSTB.  
† When SLOWCKI is enabled in the powerc register, these options reflect the low-speed internal ring oscillator.  
‡ The wait-stated clock reflects the internal instruction cycle and may be stretched based on the mwait register setting (see Table 36, mwait  
Register). During sequenced external memory accesses, it completes one cycle.  
**The sequenced wait-stated clock completes two cycles during a sequenced external memory access and may be stretched based on the mwait  
register setting (see Table 36, mwait Register).  
54  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 39. powerc Register  
The powerc register configures various power management modes.  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9—8  
7
6
5
4
3—0  
Field XTLOFF SLOWCKI NOCK INT0EN RSVD INT1EN RSVD SIO1DIS SIO2DIS PHIFDIS TIMERDIS RSVD  
Note: The reserved (RSVD) bits should always be written with zeros to make the program compatible with future chip versions.  
powerc fields  
Field  
XTLOFF  
SLOWCKI  
NOCK  
INT0EN  
INT1EN  
SIO1DIS  
SIO2DIS  
PHIFDIS  
TIMERDIS  
Description  
1 = powerdown small-signal clock input.  
1 = select ring oscillator clock (internal slow clock).  
1 = disable internal processor clock.  
1 = INT0 clears NOCK field.  
1 = INT1 clears NOCK field.  
1 = disable SIO1.  
1 = disable SIO2.  
1 = disable PHIF.  
1 = disable timer.  
A indicates that this bit is unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. An S indicates that this  
bit shadows the PC. P indicates the value on an input pin, i.e., the bit in the register reflects the value on the corre-  
sponding input pin.  
Table 40. Register Settings After Reset  
Register  
Bits 15—0  
••••••••••••••••  
Register  
ybase  
inc  
Bits 15—0  
••••••••••••••••  
0000000000000000  
0000010000000110  
••••••••••••••••  
r0  
r1  
r2  
r3  
j
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
ins  
sdx2  
saddx  
cloop  
mwait  
saddx2  
sioc2  
cbit  
••••••••••••••••  
k
rb  
••••••••••••••••  
000000000•••••••  
0000000000000000†  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••0000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
0000000000000000  
re  
pt  
pr  
0000000000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
pi  
i
p
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS  
••••••••••••••••  
sbit  
ioc  
jtag  
00000000PPPPPPPP  
0000000000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
pl  
••••••••••••••••  
a0  
••••••••••••••••  
x
••••••••••••••••  
a0l  
••••••••••••••••  
y
••••••••••••••••  
a1  
••••••••••••••••  
yl  
••••••••••••••••  
a1l  
••••••••••••••••  
auc  
psw  
c0  
c1  
c2  
sioc  
srta  
sdx  
tdms  
phifc  
pdx0  
0000000000000000  
••••00••••••••••  
timerc  
timer0  
tdms2  
srta2  
powerc  
pllc  
••••••••00000000  
0000000000000000  
••••••0000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
00000000••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
•••••••••••••••  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••0000000000  
••••••••••••••••  
ar0  
ar1  
ar2  
ar3  
••••••••••••••••  
••••••0000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
alf  
† If EXM is high and INT1 is low when RSTB goes high, mwait will contain all ones instead of all zeros.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
55  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
5.3 Instruction Set Formats  
This section defines the hardware-level encoding of the DSP1629 device instructions.  
Multiply/ALU Instructions  
Format 1: Multiply/ALU Read/Write Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
D
S
9
F1  
F1  
F1  
F1  
X
4
Y
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Format 1a: Multiply/ALU Read/Write Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
aT  
10  
S
9
X
4
Y
Y
Y
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
Format 2: Multiply/ALU Read/Write Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
D
S
9
X
4
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
Format 2a: Multiply/ALU Read/Write Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
aT  
10  
S
9
X
4
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
Special Function Instructions  
Format 3: F2 ALU Special Functions  
Field  
Bit  
T
D
S
9
F2  
F3  
CON  
2
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
1
0
Format 3a: F3 ALU Operations  
Field  
T
D
S
SRC2  
aT  
2
0
1
1
0
Immediate Operand (IM16)  
10  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
9
8
7
6
4
3
Format 3b: BMU Operations  
Field  
T
D
S
F4[3—1]  
Immediate Operand (IM16)  
10  
0
5
F4[0]  
4
AR  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
9
8
7
6
3
2
1
0
56  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Control Instructions  
Format 4: Branch Direct Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
JA  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
11  
10  
10  
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
3
3
2
2
1
0
Format 5: Branch Indirect Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
B
Reserved  
4
0
0
15  
14  
13  
12  
9
1
Format 6: Conditional Branch Qualifier/Software Interrupt (icall)  
Note that a branch instruction immediately follows except for a software interrupt (icall).  
Field  
Bit  
T
SI  
Reserved  
CON  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Data Move Instructions  
Format 7: Data Move Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
aT  
10  
R
Y/Z  
15  
14  
13  
12 11  
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
Format 8: Data Move (immediate operand—2 words)  
Field  
T
D
R
Reserved  
Immediate Operand (IM16)  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
11  
11  
10  
9
8
7
7
7
6
4
3
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
Format 9: Short Immediate Group  
Field  
Bit  
T
I
Short Immediate Operand (IM9)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
10  
9
8
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
Format 9a: Direct Addressing  
Field  
Bit  
T
R/W  
10  
DR  
1
5
OFFSET  
2
15  
14  
13  
12  
9
9
8
8
Cache Instructions  
Format 10: Do/Redo  
Field  
T
N
K
3
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
Agere Systems Inc.  
57  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Table 43. aT Field  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Specifies transfer accumulator.  
Field Descriptions  
aT  
Register  
Table 41. T Field  
0
1
Accumulator 1  
Accumulator 0  
Specifies the type of instruction.  
T
Operation  
goto JA  
Short imm j, k, rb, re  
Short imm r0, r1, r2, r3  
Y = a1[l]  
Format  
Table 44. S Field  
0000x  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01000  
01001  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
1000x  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110  
10111  
11000  
11000  
11001  
4
9
9
1
2a  
1
1a  
7
7
7
7
8
7
7
7
7
10  
7
4
3
Specifies a source accumulator.  
S
0
1
Register  
F1  
F1  
F1  
F1  
Accumulator 0  
Accumulator 1  
Z:aT[l]  
Y
aT[l] = Y  
Table 45. F1 Field  
Bit 0 = 0, aT = R  
Bit 0 = 1, aTl = R  
Bit 10 = 0, R = a0  
Bit 10 = 1, R = a0l  
R = IM16  
Bit 10 = 0, R = a1  
Bit 10 = 1, R = a1l  
Y = R  
Specifies the multiply/ALU function.  
F1  
Operation  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
aD = pp = x * y  
aD = aS + pp = x * y  
p = x * y  
aD = aS – pp = x * y  
aD = p  
Z:R  
do, redo  
R = Y  
call JA  
ifc CON  
if CON  
Y = y[l]  
Z:y[l]  
aD = aS + p  
nop  
aD = aS – p  
aD = aS | y  
aD = aS ^ y  
aS & y  
F2  
F2  
F1  
F1  
F1  
F1  
3
1
2
1
1
5
3a  
1
aS – y  
aD = y  
x = Y  
y[l] = Y  
Bit 0 = 0, branch indirect  
Bit 0 = 1, F3 ALU  
y = a0 x = X  
aD = aS + y  
aD = aS & y  
aD = aS – y  
F1  
11010 Conditional branch qualifier  
6
Table 46. X Field  
11011  
11100  
11101  
11110  
11110  
11111  
y = a1 x = X  
Y = a0[l]  
Z:y x = X  
F1  
F1  
F1  
1
1
2
3b  
9a  
1
Specifies the addressing of ROM data in two-operand  
multiply/ALU instructions. Specifies the high or low half  
of an accumulator, or the y register in one-operand mul-  
tiply/ALU instructions.  
Bit 5 = 0, F4 ALU (BMU)  
Bit 5 = 1, direct addressing  
y = Y x = X F1  
X
Operation  
Two-Operand Multiply/ALU  
pt++  
Table 42. D Field  
0
1
*
Specifies a destination accumulator.  
pt++i  
*
D
0
1
Register  
Accumulator 0  
Accumulator 1  
One-Operand Multiply/ALU  
0
1
aTl, yl  
aTh, yh  
58  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Table 49. F2 Field  
Specifies the special function to be performed.  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 47. Y Field  
F2  
Operation  
aD = aS >> 1  
aD = aS << 1  
aD = aS >> 4  
aD = aS << 4  
aD = aS >> 8  
aD = aS << 8  
aD = aS >> 16  
aD = aS << 16  
aD = p  
Specifies the form of register indirect addressing with  
postmodification.  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
Y
Operation  
r0  
0000  
*
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
r0++  
*
r0--  
*
r0++j  
*
*
*
*
r1  
*
r1++  
*
aDh = aSh + 1  
aD = ~aS  
r1--  
*
r1++j  
r2  
aD = rnd(aS)  
aD = y  
*
r2++  
*
aD = aS + 1  
aD = aS  
r2--  
*
aD = – aS  
r2++j  
r3  
*
Table 50. CON Field  
r3++  
*
Specifies the condition for special functions and condi-  
tional control instructions.  
r3--  
*
r3++j  
CON  
Condition  
mi  
CON  
01110  
01111  
10000  
10001  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110  
10111  
11000  
11001  
11010  
11011  
11100  
Condition  
true  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
Table 48. Z Field  
pl  
false  
gt  
Specifies the form of register indirect compound ad-  
dressing with postmodification.  
eq  
ne  
le  
Z
Operation  
lvs  
allt  
0000  
r0zp  
lvc  
allf  
*
*
mvs  
mvc  
heads  
tails  
c0ge  
c0lt  
somet  
somef  
oddp  
evenp  
mns1  
nmns1  
npint  
njint  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
r0pz  
r0m2  
*
r0jk  
*
r1zp  
r1pz  
*
*
r1m2  
*
c1ge  
c1lt  
r1jk  
*
r2zp  
*
lock  
Other  
codes  
Reserved  
r2pz  
*
r2m2  
*
r2jk  
*
r3zp  
*
r3pz  
*
r3m2  
*
r3jk  
*
Agere Systems Inc.  
59  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Table 53. DR Field  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
DR Value  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
Register  
Table 51. R Field  
r0  
r1  
r2  
r3  
a0  
a0l  
a1  
a1l  
y
Specifies the register for data move instructions.  
R
Register  
R
Register  
inc  
000000  
000001  
000010  
000011  
000100  
000101  
000110  
000111  
001000  
001001  
001010  
001011  
001100  
001101  
001110  
001111  
010000  
010001  
010010  
010011  
010100  
010101  
010110  
010111  
011000  
011001  
011010  
011011  
011100  
011101  
011110  
011111  
r0  
100000  
100001  
100010  
100011  
100100  
100101  
100110  
100111  
101000  
101001  
101010  
101011  
101100  
101101  
101110  
101111  
110000  
110001  
110010  
110011  
110100  
110101  
110110  
110111  
111000  
111001  
111010  
111011  
111100  
111101  
111110  
111111  
r1  
ins  
r2  
sdx2  
r3  
saddx  
cloop  
mwait  
saddx2  
sioc2  
cbit  
j
k
rb  
yl  
re  
p
pt  
pl  
pr  
sbit  
x
pi  
i
ioc  
pt  
jtag  
pr  
psw  
p
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
a0  
pl  
Table 54. I Field  
pllc  
Specifies a register for short immediate data move in-  
structions.  
Reserved  
x
y
a0l  
I
Register  
r0/j  
yl  
a1  
00  
01  
10  
11  
auc  
psw  
c0  
a1l  
r1/k  
timerc  
timer0  
tdms2  
srta2  
powerc  
Reserved  
ar0  
r2/rb  
r3/re  
c1  
Table 55. SI Field  
c2  
Specifies when the conditional branch qualifier instruc-  
tion should be interpreted as a software interrupt in-  
struction.  
sioc  
srta  
sdx  
tdms  
phifc  
pdx0  
Reserved  
ybase  
ar1  
SI  
0
Operation  
ar2  
Not a software interrupt  
Software interrupt  
ar3  
1
Reserved  
alf  
Table 52. B Field  
Specifies the type of branch instruction (except software  
interrupt).  
B
Operation  
return  
000  
001  
010  
011  
1xx  
ireturn  
goto pt  
call pt  
Reserved  
60  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
5 Software Architecture (continued)  
Table 58. BMU Encodings  
F4  
AR  
Operation  
aD = aS >> arM  
N Field  
0000  
0001  
0000  
0001  
1000  
1001  
1000  
1001  
1100  
1101  
1100  
1101  
0000  
0001  
1110  
0010  
1110  
0010  
1110  
1010  
0111  
0111  
00xx  
00xx  
10xx  
10xx  
0000  
0000  
1000  
1000  
0000  
0000  
1000  
1000  
1100  
11xx  
0000  
00xx  
0100  
01xx  
1000  
10xx  
0000  
0001  
Number of instructions to be loaded into the cache. Zero  
implies redo operation.  
aD = aS << arM  
aD = aS >>> arM  
aD = aS <<< arM  
aD = aS >> aS  
K Field  
aD = aS << aS  
Number of times the N instructions in cache are to be  
executed. Zero specifies use of value in cloop register.  
aD = aS >>> aS  
aD = aS <<< aS  
JA Field  
aD = aS >> IM16  
aD = aS << IM16  
aD = aS >>> IM16  
aD = aS <<< IM16  
aD = exp(aS)  
12-bit jump address.  
R/W Field  
A zero specifies a write, *(O) = DR.  
A one specifies a read, DR = *(O).  
aD = norm(aS, arM)  
aD = extracts(aS, IM16)  
aD = extracts(aS, arM)  
aD = extractz(aS, IM16)  
aD = extractz(aS, arM)  
aD = insert(aS, IM16)  
aD = insert(aS, arM)  
aD = aS:aa0  
Table 56. F3 Field  
Specifies the operation in an F3 ALU instruction.  
F3  
Operation  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1101  
1110  
1111  
aD = aS[h, l]  
aD = aS[h, l]  
aS[h, l]  
|
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
{aT, IM16, p}  
^
aD = aS:aa1  
&
+
&
Note: xx encodes the auxiliary register to be used; 00 (ar0), 01(ar1),  
10 (ar2), or 11(ar3).  
aS[h, l]  
aD = aS[h, l]  
aD = aS[h, l]  
aD = aS[h, l]  
Table 57. SRC2 Field  
Specifies operands in an F3 ALU instruction.  
SRC2  
00  
Operands  
aSl, IM16  
aSh, IM16  
aS, aT  
10  
01  
11  
aS, p  
Agere Systems Inc.  
61  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
6 Signal Descriptions  
16  
RSTB  
CKO  
CKI2  
CKI  
AB[15:0]  
16  
SYSTEM  
INTERFACE  
OR  
DB[15:0]  
RWN  
CONTROL I/O  
INTERFACE  
EXTERNAL  
EXM  
STOP  
MEMORY  
2
4
INT[1:0]  
INTERFACE  
EROM  
ERAMHI  
IO  
VEC[3:0] OR IOBIT[4:7]  
IACK  
TRAP  
ERAMLO  
DSEL  
PSTAT OR DO2  
PODS OR OLD2  
PCSN OR OCK2  
POBE OR OBE2  
PBSEL OR SYNC2  
PB0 OR ICK2  
PARALLEL HOST  
INTERFACE  
DSP1629  
DO1  
OR  
SERIAL INTERFACE #2  
AND CONTROL I/O  
INTERFACE  
OLD1  
OCK1  
OBE1  
DI1  
PIDS OR ILD2  
PB1 OR DI2  
SERIAL  
INTERFACE #1  
PIBF OR IBF2  
ILD1  
PB2 OR DOEN2  
ICK1  
PB3 OR SADD2  
IBF1  
SYNC1  
SADD1  
DOEN1  
4
PB[7:4] OR IOBIT[3:O]  
JTAG TEST  
INTERFACE  
TRST  
TDI  
TDO  
TCK  
TMS  
5-4006 (F).i  
Figure 9. DSP1629 Pinout by Interface  
Figure 9, DSP1629 Pinout by Interface, shows the pi-  
nout for the DSP1629. The signals can be separated  
into five interfaces, as shown. These interfaces and the  
signals that comprise them are described in Section 6.1,  
System Interface.  
and PODS status bits set), alf (upper 2 bits, AWAIT and  
LOWPR), ioc, rb, and re registers are cleared. The  
mwait register is initialized to all 0s (zero wait-states)  
unless the EXM pin is high and the INT1 pin is low. In  
that case, the mwait register is initialized to all 1s  
(15 wait-states).  
Reset clears IACK, VEC[3:0]/IOBIT[4:7], IBF, and IBF2.  
The DAU condition flags are not affected by reset.  
IOBIT[7:0] are initialized as inputs. If any of the IOBIT  
pins are switched to outputs (by writing sbit), their initial  
value will be logic zero (see Table 40, Register Settings  
After Reset).  
6.1 System Interface  
The system interface consists of the clock, interrupt,  
and reset signals for the processor.  
RSTB  
Upon negation of the signal, the processor begins exe-  
cution at location 0x0000 in the active memory map  
(see Section 4.4, Memory Maps and Wait-States).  
Reset: Negative assertion. A high-to-low transition  
causes the processor to enter the reset state. The auc,  
powerc, sioc, sioc2, phifc, pdx0, tdms, tdms2, timerc,  
timer0, sbit (upper byte), inc, ins (except OBE, OBE2,  
62  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
PLL is programmed.  
6 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
A logic 0.  
A logic 1.  
CKI  
Input Clock: A mask-programmable option selects one  
of three possible input buffers for the CKI pin (see Sec-  
tion 7, Mask-Programmable Options, and Table 1, Pin  
Descriptions). The internal CKI from the output of the  
selected input buffer can then drive the internal proces-  
sor clock directly (1X) or drive the on-chip PLL (see Sec-  
tion 4.13, Power Management). The PLL allows the CKI  
input clock to be at a lower frequency than the internal  
processor clock.  
INT[1:0]  
Processor Interrupts 0 and 1: Positive assertion.  
Hardware interrupt inputs to the DSP1629. Each is en-  
abled via the inc register. When enabled and asserted,  
each cause the processor to vector to the memory loca-  
tion described in Table 4, Interrupt Vector Table. INT1  
is used in conjunction with EXM to select the desired re-  
set initialization of the mwait register (see Table 36,  
mwait Register). When both INT0 and RSTB are assert-  
ed, all output and bidirectional pins (except TDO, which  
3-states by JTAG control) are put in a 3-state condition.  
CKI2  
Input Clock 2: Used with mask-programmable input  
clock options which require an external small signal dif-  
ferential across CKI and CKI2 (see Table 1, Pin De-  
scriptions). When the CMOS option is selected, this pin  
should be tied to VSSA.  
VEC[3:0]  
Interrupt Output Vector: These four pins indicate  
which interrupt is currently being serviced by the device.  
Table 4, Interrupt Vector Table, shows the code associ-  
ated with each interrupt condition. VEC[3:0] are multi-  
plexed with IOBIT[4:7].  
STOP  
Stop Input Clock: Negative assertion. A high-to-low  
transition synchronously stops all of the internal proces-  
sor clocks, leaving the processor in a defined state. Re-  
turning the pin high will synchronously restart the  
processor clocks to continue program execution from  
where it left off, without any loss of state. This hardware  
feature has the same effect as setting the NOCK bit in  
the powerc register (see Table 39, powerc Register).  
IACK  
Interrupt Acknowledge: Positive assertion. IACK  
signals when an interrupt is being serviced by the  
DSP1629. IACK remains asserted while in an interrupt  
service routine, and is cleared when the ireturn instruc-  
tion is executed.  
CKO  
TRAP  
Clock Out: Buffered output clock with options program-  
mable via the ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Register).  
The selectable CKO options (see Table 38, ioc Register  
and Table 29, Interrupt Control (inc) Register) are as fol-  
lows:  
Trap Signal: Positive assertion. When asserted, the  
processor is put into the trap condition, which normally  
causes a branch to the location 0x0046. The hardware  
development system (HDS) can configure the trap pin  
to cause an HDS trap, which causes a branch to loca-  
tion 0x0003. Although normally an input, the pin can be  
configured as an output by the HDS. As an output, the  
pin can be used to signal an HDS breakpoint in a multi-  
ple processor environment.  
A free-running output clock at the frequency of the in-  
ternal processor clock; runs at the internal ring oscil-  
lator frequency when SLOWCKI is enabled.  
A wait-stated clock based on the internal instruction  
cycle; runs at the internal ring oscillator frequency  
when SLOWCKI is enabled.  
A sequenced, wait-stated clock based on the EMI se-  
quencer cycle; runs at the internal ring oscillator fre-  
quency when SLOWCKI is enabled.  
A free-running output clock that runs at the CKI rate,  
independent of the powerc register setting. This op-  
tion is only available with the small-signal clock op-  
tions. When the PLL is selected, the CKO frequency  
equals the input CKI frequency, regardless of how the  
Agere Systems Inc.  
63  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
EROM  
6 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
External ROM Enable Signal: Negative assertion.  
When asserted, the signal indicates an access to exter-  
nal program memory (see Table 5, Instruction/Coeffi-  
cient Memory Maps). This signal's leading edge can be  
delayed via the ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Register).  
6.2 External Memory Interface  
The external memory interface is used to interface the  
DSP1629 to external memory and I/O devices. It sup-  
ports read/write operations from/to program and data  
memory spaces. The interface supports four external  
memory segments. Each external memory segment  
can have an independent number of software-program-  
mable wait-states. One hardware address is decoded,  
and an enable line is provided, to allow glueless I/O in-  
terfacing.  
ERAMHI  
External RAM High Enable Signal: Negative asser-  
tion. When asserted, the signal indicates an access to  
external data memory addresses 0x8000 through  
0xFFFF (see Table 6, Data Memory Maps). This sig-  
nal's leading edge can be delayed via the ioc register  
(see Table 38, ioc Register).  
AB[15:0]  
External Memory Address Bus: Output only. This  
16-bit bus supplies the address for read or write opera-  
tions to the external memory or I/O. During external  
memory accesses, AB[15:0] retain the value of the last  
valid external access.  
ERAMLO  
External RAM Low Enable Signal: Negative asser-  
tion. When asserted, the signal indicates an access to  
external data memory addresses 0x4100 through  
0x7FFF (see Table 6, Data Memory Maps). This sig-  
nal's leading edge can be delayed via the ioc register  
(see Table 38, ioc Register).  
DB[15:0]  
External Memory Data Bus: This 16-bit bidirectional  
data bus is used for read or write operations to the ex-  
ternal memory or I/O.  
I/O  
External I/O Enable Signal: Negative assertion. When  
asserted, the signal indicates an access to external data  
memory addresses 0x4000 through 0x40FF (see  
Table 6, Data Memory Maps). This memory segment is  
intended for memory-mapped I/O. This signal's leading  
edge can be delayed via the ioc register (see Table 38,  
ioc Register).  
RWN  
Read/Write Not: When a logic 1, the pin indicates that  
the memory access is a read operation. When a logic 0,  
the memory access is a write operation.  
EXM  
External Memory Select: Input only. This signal is  
latched into the device on the rising edge of RSTB. The  
value of EXM latched in determines whether the internal  
ROM is addressable in the instruction/coefficient mem-  
ory map. If EXM is low, internal ROM is addressable. If  
EXM is high, only external ROM is addressable in the  
instruction/coefficient memory map (see Table 5, In-  
struction/Coefficient Memory Maps). EXM chooses be-  
tween MAP1 or MAP2 and between MAP3 or MAP4.  
64  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
OCK1  
6 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
Output Clock: The clock for serial output data. In active  
mode, OCK1 is an output; in passive mode, OCK1 is an  
input, according to the sioc register OCK field (see Ta-  
ble 22, Serial I/O Control Registers). Input typically has  
0.7 V hysteresis.  
6.3 Serial Interface #1  
The serial interface pins implement a full-featured syn-  
chronous/asynchronous serial I/O channel. In addition,  
several pins offer a glueless TDM interface for multipro-  
cessing communication applications (see Figure 6, Mul-  
tiprocessor Communication and Connections).  
OLD1  
Output Load: The clock for loading the output shift reg-  
ister, osr, from the output buffer sdx[out]. A falling edge  
of OLD1 indicates the beginning of a serial output word.  
In active mode, OLD1 is an output; in passive, OLD1 is  
an input, according to the sioc register OLD field (see  
Table 22, Serial I/O Control Registers). Input typically  
has 0.7 V hysteresis.  
DI1  
Data Input: Serial data is latched on the rising edge of  
ICK1, either LSB or MSB first, according to the sioc reg-  
ister MSB field (see Table 22, Serial I/O Control Regis-  
ters).  
ICK1  
OBE1  
Input Clock: The clock for serial input data. In active  
mode, ICK1 is an output; in passive mode, ICK1 is an  
input, according to the sioc register ICK field (see Table  
22, Serial I/O Control Registers). Input typically has  
0.7 V hysteresis.  
Output Buffer Empty: Positive assertion. OBE1 is as-  
serted when the output buffer, sdx[out], is emptied  
(moved to the output shift register for transmission). It is  
cleared with a write to the buffer, as in sdx = a0. OBE1  
is also set by asserting RSTB.  
ILD1  
SADD1  
Input Load: The clock for loading the input buffer,  
sdx[in], from the input shift register isr. A falling edge of  
ILD1 indicates the beginning of a serial input word. In  
active mode, ILD1 is an output; in passive mode, ILD1  
is an input, according to the sioc register ILD field (see  
Table 22, Serial I/O Control Registers). Input typically  
has 0.7 V hysteresis.  
Serial Address: Negative assertion. A 16-bit serial bit  
stream typically used for addressing during multiproces-  
sor communication between multiple DSP16xx devices.  
In multiprocessor mode, SADD1 is an output when the  
tdms time slot dictates a serial transmission; otherwise,  
it is an input. Both the source and destination DSP can  
be identified in the transmission. SADD1 is always an  
output when not in multiprocessor mode and can be  
used as a second 16-bit serial output. See the  
IBF1  
DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital Signal Processor In-  
formation Manual for additional information. SADD1 is  
3-stated when DOEN1 is high. When used on a bus,  
SADD1 should be pulled high through a 5 kresistor.  
Input Buffer Full: Positive assertion. IBF1 is asserted  
when the input buffer, sdx[in], is filled. IBF1 is negated  
by a read of the buffer, as in a0 = sdx. IBF1 is also ne-  
gated by asserting RSTB.  
SYNC1  
DO1  
Multiprocessor Synchronization: Typically used in  
the multiprocessor mode, a falling edge of SYNC1 indi-  
cates the first word (time slot 0) of a TDM I/O stream  
and causes the resynchronization of the active ILD1  
and OLD1 generators. SYNC1 is an output when the  
tdms register SYNC field is set (i.e., selects the master  
DSP and uses time slot 0 for transmit). As an input,  
SYNC1 must be tied low unless part of a TDM interface.  
When used as an output, SYNC1 = [ILD1/OLD1]/8 or  
16, depending on the setting of the SYNCSP field of the  
tdms register. When configured as described above,  
SYNC1 can be used to generate a slow clock for SIO  
operations. Input typically has 0.7 V hysteresis.  
Data Output: The serial data output from the output  
shift register (osr), either LSB or MSB first (according to  
the sioc register MSB field). DO1 changes on the rising  
edges of OCK1. DO1 is 3-stated when DOEN1 is high.  
DOEN1  
Data Output Enable: Negative assertion. An input  
when not in the multiprocessor mode. DO1 and SADD1  
are enabled only if DOEN1 is low. DOEN1 is bidirection-  
al when in the multiprocessor mode (tdms register  
MODE field set). In the multiprocessor mode, DOEN1  
indicates a valid time slot for a serial output.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
65  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
PIDS/PRWN indicates an external read operation by the  
external device.  
6 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
6.4 Parallel Host Interface or Serial Interface  
#2 and Control I/O Interface  
PODS  
Parallel Output Data Strobe: An input pin, software  
configurable to support both Intel and Motorola proto-  
cols.  
This interface pin multiplexes a parallel host interface  
with a second serial I/O interface and a 4-bit I/O inter-  
face. The interface selection is made by writing the  
ESIO2 bit in the ioc register (see Table 38, ioc Register  
and Section 4.1, DSP1629 Architectural Overview). The  
functions and signals for the second SIO correspond ex-  
actly with those in SIO #1. Therefore, the following pin  
descriptions discuss only PHIF and BIO pin functional-  
ity.  
In Intel mode: negative assertion. When PODS is pulled  
low by an external device, the DSP1629 places the con-  
tents of the parallel output register, pdx0, onto the PB  
bus.  
In Motorola mode: software-configurable assertion lev-  
el. The external device uses PODS/PDS as its data  
strobe for both read and write operations.  
PB[7:0]  
Parallel I/O Data Bus: This 8-bit bidirectional bus is  
PIBF  
used to input data to, or output data from, the PHIF.  
Parallel Input Buffer Full: An output pin with positive  
assertion; configurable in software. This flag is cleared  
after reset, indicating an empty input buffer pdx0[in].  
Note that PB[3:0] are pin multiplexed with SIO2 func-  
tionality, and PB[7:4] are pin multiplexed with BIO unit  
pins IOBIT[3:0] (see Section 4.1, DSP1629 Architectur-  
al Overview).  
PIBF is set immediately after the rising edge of PIDS or  
PCSN, indicating that data has been latched into the  
pdx0[in] register. When the DSP1629 reads the con-  
tents of this register, emptying the buffer, the flag is  
cleared.  
PCSN  
Peripheral Chip Select Not: Negative assertion. PCSN  
is an input. While PCSN is low, the data strobes PIDS  
and PODS are enabled. While PCSN is high, the  
DSP1629 ignores any activity on PIDS and PODS.  
Configured in software, PIBF may become the logical  
OR of the PIBF and POBE flags.  
POBE  
PBSEL  
Parallel Output Buffer Empty: An output pin with pos-  
itive assertion; configurable in software. This flag is set  
after reset, indicating an empty output buffer pdx0[out].  
Peripheral Byte Select: An input pin, configurable in  
software. Selects the high or low byte of pdx0 available  
for host accesses.  
POBE is set immediately after the rising edge of PODS  
or PCSN, indicating that the data in pdx0[out] has been  
driven onto the PB bus. When the DSP1629 writes to  
pdx0[out], filling the buffer, this flag is cleared.  
PSTAT  
Peripheral Status Select: PSTAT is an input. When a  
logic 0, the PHIF will output the pdx0[out] register on the  
PB bus. When a logic 1, the PHIF will output the con-  
tents of the PSTAT register on PB[7:0].  
6.5 Control I/O Interface  
This interface is used for status and control operations  
provided by the bit I/O unit of the DSP1629. It is pin mul-  
tiplexed with the PHIF and VEC[3:0] pins (see Section  
4.1, DSP1629 Architectural Overview). Setting the  
ESIO2 and EBIOH bits in the ioc register provides a full  
8-bit BIO interface at the associated pins.  
PIDS  
Parallel Input Data Strobe: An input pin, software con-  
figurable to support both Intel and Motorola protocols.  
In Intel mode: negative assertion. PIDS is pulled low by  
an external device to indicate that data is available on  
the PB bus. The DSP latches data on the PB bus on the  
rising edge (low-to-high transition) of PIDS or PCSN,  
whichever comes first.  
IOBIT[7:0]  
I/O Bits [7:0]: Each of these bits can be independently  
configured as either an input or an output. As outputs,  
they can be independently set, toggled, or cleared. As  
inputs, they can be tested independently or in combina-  
tions for various data patterns.  
In Motorola mode: PIDS/PRWN functions as a read/  
write strobe. The external device sets PIDS/PRWN to a  
logic 0 to indicate that data is available on the PB bus  
(write operation by the external device). A logic 1 on  
66  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
TDO  
6 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
Test Data Output: JTAG serial output signal. Serial-  
scanned data and status bits are output on this pin.  
6.6 JTAG Test Interface  
The JTAG test interface has features that allow pro-  
grams and data to be downloaded into the DSP via four  
pins. This provides extensive test and diagnostic capa-  
bility. In addition, internal circuitry allows the device to  
be controlled through the JTAG port to provide on-chip  
in-circuit emulation. Agere Systems provides hardware  
and software tools to interface to the on-chip HDS via  
the JTAG port.  
TMS  
Test Mode Select: JTAG mode control signal that,  
when combined with TCK, controls the scan operations.  
This pin has an internal pull-up resistor.  
TCK  
Note: The DSP1629 provides all JTAG/IEEE 1149.1  
standard test capabilities, including boundary  
scan. See the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital  
Signal Processor Information Manual for addi-  
tional information on the JTAG test interface.  
Test Clock: JTAG serial shift clock. This signal clocks  
all data into the port through TDI, and out of the port  
through TDO, and controls the port by latching the TMS  
signal inside the state-machine controller.  
TRST  
TDI  
Test Reset: Negative assertion. JTAG test reset. When  
asserted low, asynchronously resets JTAG TAP con-  
troller. In an application environment, this pin must be  
asserted prior to or concurrent with RSTB. This pin has  
an internal pull-up resistor.  
Test Data Input: JTAG serial input signal. All serial-  
scanned data and instructions are input on this pin. This  
pin has an internal pull-up resistor.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
67  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
7 Mask-Programmable Options  
The DSP1629 contains a ROM that is mask-programmable. The selection of several programmable features is  
made when a custom ROM is encoded. These features select the input clock options, the instruction/coefficient  
memory map option, and the hardware emulation or ROM security option, as summarized in Table 59, DSP1629  
ROM Options.  
Table 59. DSP1629 ROM Options  
Features  
Options  
Comments  
Input Clock  
CMOS Level  
Small Signal  
2.7 V and 3 V.  
2.7 V and 3 V.  
Memory Map  
ROM Security  
DSP1629x16  
DSP1629x10  
16 Kwords DPRAM.  
10 Kwords DPRAM.  
Specify and link 1629hds.v# *,  
allows emulation.  
Nonsecure  
Secure  
Specify and link crc16.v# ,  
no emulation capability.  
* 1629hds.v# (# indicates the current version number) is the relocatable HDS object code. It uses approximately 140 words  
and must reside in the first 4 Kwords of ROM.  
† crc16.v# is the cyclic redundancy check object code. It uses approximately 75 words and must reside in the first 4 Kwords  
of ROM. See the DSP1600 Support Tools Manual for detailed information.  
7.1 Input Clock Options  
For all input options, the input clock CKI can run at some fraction of the internal clock frequency by setting the PLL  
multiplication factors appropriately (see Section 4.12, Clock Synthesis). When the PLL is bypassed, the input clock  
CKI frequency is the internal clock frequency.  
7.2 Memory Map Options  
The DSP1629 offers a DSP1629x16 or a DSP1629x10, where the difference is in the memory maps. The  
DSP1629x16 contains 16 Kwords of internal RAM (DPRAM). The DSP1629x10 supports the use of only 10 Kwords  
of DPRAM. See Section 4.4, Memory Maps and Wait-States, for further description.  
7.3 ROM Security Options  
The DSP1600 hardware development system (HDS) provides on-chip in-circuit emulation and requires that the re-  
locatable HDS code be linked to the application code. This code's object file is called 1629hds.v#, where # is a  
unique version identifier. Refer to the DSP1629-ST software tools release for more specific information. If on-chip,  
in-circuit emulation is desired, a nonsecure ROM must be chosen. If ROM security is desired with the DSP1629, the  
HDS cannot be used. To provide testing of the internal ROM contents on a secure ROM device, a cyclic redundancy  
check (CRC) program is called by and linked with the user's source code. The CRC code resides in the first  
4 Kwords of ROM.  
See the DSP1600 Support Tools Manual for more detailed information.  
68  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
8 Device Characteristics  
8.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Stresses in excess of the absolute maximum ratings can cause permanent damage to the device. These are abso-  
lute stress ratings only. Functional operation of the device is not implied at these or any other conditions in excess  
of those given in the operational sections of the data sheet. Exposure to absolute maximum ratings for extended  
periods can adversely affect device reliability.  
External leads can be bonded and soldered safely at temperatures of up to 300 °C. (TBD for 144-pin PBGA.)  
Voltage Range on VDD with Respect to Ground Using Devices Designed  
for 3 V Operation ..............................................................................................................................–0.5 V to +4.6 V  
Voltage Range on Any Pin ............................................................................................. VSS – 0.5 V to VDD + 0.5 V  
Power Dissipation................................................................................................................................................ 1 W  
Ambient Temperature Range ......................................................................................................... –40 °C to +85 °C  
Storage Temperature Range.................................................................................................................... –65 °C to +150 °C  
8.2 Handling Precautions  
All MOS devices must be handled with certain precautions to avoid damage due to the accumulation of static  
charge. Although input protection circuitry has been incorporated into the devices to minimize the effect of this static  
buildup, proper precautions should be taken to avoid exposure to electrostatic discharge during handling and mount-  
ing. Agere Systems employs a human-body model for ESD-susceptibility testing. Since the failure voltage of elec-  
tronic devices is dependent on the current, voltage, and hence, the resistance and capacitance, it is important that  
standard values be employed to establish a reference by which to compare test data. Values of 100 pF and 1500 Ω  
are the most common and are the values used in the Agere Systems human-body model test circuit. The breakdown  
voltage for the DSP1629 is greater than 2000 V.  
8.3 Recommended Operating Conditions  
Table 60. Recommended Operating Conditions  
Maximum  
Instruction  
Rate (MIPS)  
Device  
Speed  
Input Clock  
Package  
Supply Voltage  
VDD (V)  
Ambient  
Temperature TA (°C)  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
52  
19.2 ns  
12.5 ns  
16.7 ns  
10 ns  
CMOS, Small-signal  
CMOS, Small-signal  
CMOS, Small-signal  
CMOS, Small-signal  
PBGA  
BQFP  
or TQFP  
2.7  
3.3  
–40  
85  
80  
PBGA  
BQFP  
or TQFP  
2.7  
3.0  
3.0  
3.3  
3.6  
3.6  
–40  
–40  
–40  
85  
85  
85  
60  
PBGA  
BQFP  
or TQFP  
100  
PBGA  
BQFP  
or TQFP  
The ratio of the instruction cycle rate to the input clock frequency is 1:1 without the PLL (referred to as 1X operation),  
and M/(2N) with the PLL selected (see Section 4.12, Clock Synthesis). Device speeds greater than 50 MIPS do not  
support 1X  
operation; use the PLL.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
69  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
8 Device Characteristics (continued)  
8.4 Package Thermal Considerations  
The recommended operating temperature specified in Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions, is based  
on the maximum power, package type, and maximum junction temperature. The following equations describe the  
relationship between these parameters. If the applications' maximum power is less than the worst-case value, this  
relationship determines a higher maximum ambient temperature or the maximum temperature measured at top  
dead center of the package.  
TA = TJ – P x ΘJA  
TTDC = TJ – P x ΘJ-TDC  
where TA is the still-air ambient temperature and TTDC is the temperature measured by a thermocouple at the top  
dead center of the package.  
Maximum Junction Temperature (TJ) in 100-Pin BQFP..................................................................................100 °C  
100-pin BQFP Maximum Thermal Resistance in Still-Air-Ambient (ΘJA) ..................................................... 55 °C/W  
100-pin BQFP Maximum Thermal Resistance, Junction to Top Dead Center (ΘJ-TDC)............................... 12 °C/W  
Maximum Junction Temperature (TJ) in 100-Pin TQFP ..................................................................................100 °C  
100-pin TQFP Maximum Thermal Resistance in Still-Air-Ambient (ΘJA) ..................................................... 30 °C/W  
100-pin TQFP Maximum Thermal Resistance, Junction to Top Dead Center (ΘJ-TDC)................................. 6 °C/W  
Maximum Junction Temperature (TJ) in 144-Pin PBGA..................................................................................100 °C  
144-pin PBGA Maximum Thermal Resistance in Still-Air-Ambient (ΘJA)..........................TBD (estimated 30 °C/W)  
144-pin PBGA Maximum Thermal Resistance, Junction to Top Dead Center (ΘJ-TDC)..................................... TBD  
WARNING: Due to package thermal constraints, proper precautions in the user's application should be tak-  
en to avoid exceeding the maximum junction temperature of 100 °C. Otherwise, the device will  
be affected adversely.  
70  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
9 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements  
The following electrical characteristics are preliminary and are subject to change. Electrical characteristics refer to the  
behavior of the device under specified conditions. Electrical requirements refer to conditions imposed on the user for  
proper operation of the device. The parameters in Table 61, Electrical Characteristics and Requirements, are valid for  
the conditions described in Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions.  
Table 61. Electrical Characteristics and Requirements  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Input Voltage:  
Low  
High  
VIL  
VIH  
–0.3  
0.7 * VDD  
0.3 * VDD  
VDD + 0.3  
V
V
Input Current (except TMS, TDI):  
Low (VIL = 0 V, VDD = 5.25 V)  
High (VIH = 5.25 V, VDD = 5.25 V)  
Input Current (TMS, TDI):  
Low (VIL = 0 V, VDD = 5.25 V)  
High (VIH = 5.25 V, VDD = 5.25 V)  
Output Low Voltage:  
IIL  
IIH  
–5  
5
µA  
µA  
IIL  
IIH  
–100  
5
µA  
µA  
Low (IOL = 2.0 mA)  
Low (IOL = 50 µA)  
VOL  
VOL  
0.4  
0.2  
V
V
Output High Voltage:  
High (IOH = –2.0 mA)  
High (IOH = –50 µA)  
VOH  
VOH  
VDD – 0.7  
VDD – 0.2  
V
V
Output 3-State Current:  
Low (VDD = 5.25 V, VIL = 0 V)  
High (VDD = 5.25 V, VIH = 5.25 V)  
Input Capacitance  
IOZL  
IOZH  
CI  
–10  
10  
5
µA  
µA  
pF  
Table 62. Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
CKI CMOS Level Input Voltage:  
Low  
High  
VIL  
VIH  
–0.3  
0.7 * VDD  
0.3 * VDD  
VDD + 0.3  
V
V
Small-signal Peak-to-peak Voltage  
Vpp  
0.6  
V
(on CKI)  
DCyc  
Vin  
45  
55  
%
V
Small-signal Input Duty Cycle  
Small-signal Input Voltage Range  
(pins: CKI, CKI2)  
0.2 * VDD  
0.6 * VDD  
Small-signal Buffer Frequency Range  
fss  
35  
MHz  
The small-signal buffer must be used in single-ended mode where an ac waveform (sine or square) is applied to CKI and a dc voltage approx-  
imately equal to the average value of CKI is applied to CKI2, as shown in the following figure. The maximum allowable ripple on CKI2 is 100 mV.  
Duty cycle for a sine wave is defined as the percentage of time during each clock cycle that the voltage on CKI exceeds the voltage on CKI2.  
CKI  
CKI2  
Agere Systems Inc.  
71  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
9 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)  
Table 63. PLL Electrical Specifications, VCO Frequency Ranges  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
VCO Frequency Range (VDD = 3 V ± 10%)*  
VCO Frequency Range (VDD = 3.0 V – 3.6 V)  
Input Jitter at CKI  
fVCO  
50  
160  
MHz  
fVCO  
50  
200  
200  
MHz  
ps-rms  
*
The M and N counter values in the pllc register must be set so that the VCO will operate in the appropriate range (see Table 63, PLL Electrical  
Specifications, VCO Frequency Ranges). Choose the lowest value of N and then the appropriate value of M for fINTERNAL CLOCK = fCKI x (M/  
(2N)) = fVCO/2.  
Table 64. PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Register Settings  
Typical Lock-in Time (µs)*  
M
VDD  
pllc13 (ICP)  
pllc12  
Reserved  
pllc[11:8]  
(LF[3:0])  
23—24  
21—22  
19—20  
16—18  
12—15  
8—11  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
2.7 V – 3.6 V  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1011  
1010  
1001  
1000  
0111  
0110  
0100  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
2—7  
*
Lock-in time represents the time following assertion of the PLLEN bit of the pllc register during which the PLL output clock is unstable. The  
DSP must operate from the 1X CKI input clock or from the slow ring oscillator while the PLL is locking. Completion of the lock-in interval is  
indicated by assertion of the LOCK flag.  
72  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
9 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)  
VDD  
VDD – 0.1  
DEVICE  
UNDER  
TEST  
VDD – 0.2  
VOH  
IOH  
VDD – 0.3  
VDD – 0.4  
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
IOH (mA)  
5-4007 (F).a  
Figure 10. Plot of VOH vs. IOH Under Typical Operating Conditions  
0.4  
0.3  
DEVICE  
UNDER  
TEST  
0.2  
VOL  
IOL  
0.1  
0
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
IOL (mA)  
5-4008 (F).b  
Figure 11. Plot of VOL vs. IOL Under Typical Operating Conditions  
Agere Systems Inc.  
73  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
9 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)  
9.1 Power Dissipation  
Power dissipation is highly dependent on DSP program activity and the frequency of operation. The typical power  
dissipation listed is for a selected application. The following electrical characteristics are preliminary and are subject  
to change.  
Table 65. Power Dissipation and Wake-Up Latency  
Typical Power Dissipation (mW)  
I/O Units ON I/O Units OFF  
powerc[7:4] = 0x0 powerc[7:4] = 0xf During Wake State) During Wake State)  
Wake-Up Latency  
Operating Mode  
(PLL Not Used (PLL Used  
(Unused inputs at VDD or VSS)  
VDD=  
3 V  
3 V  
3 V  
3 V  
Normal Operation ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Disabled  
CKI and CKO = 40 MHz:  
CMOS  
93.7  
96.3  
91.2  
93.7  
Small Signal  
CKI and CKO = 0 MHz:  
CMOS  
0.17  
2.75  
0.17  
2.75  
Small Signal  
Normal Operationioc = 0x0180  
PLL Enabled pllc = 0xFC0E  
CKI = 10 MHz CKO = 40 MHz  
CMOS  
96.7  
99.3  
94.2  
96.7  
Small Signal  
Power Management Modes CKO = 40 MHz  
Standard Sleep, External Interrupt  
alf[15] = 1, ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Disabled During Sleep  
3T* + tL†  
3T* + tL†  
14.0  
16.3  
9.3  
3T*  
3T*  
CMOS  
12.0  
Small Signal  
Standard Sleep, External Interrupt  
alf[15] = 1, ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Enabled During Sleep  
CMOS  
16.5  
18.9  
11.2  
14.0  
3T*  
3T*  
Small Signal  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock  
Small Signal Enabled  
powerc[15:14] = 01,  
alf[15] = 1, ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Disabled During Sleep  
5.0 µs + tL†  
5.0 µs + tL†  
0.7  
3.7  
0.5  
3.5  
5.0 µs  
5.0 µs  
CMOS  
Small Signal  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock  
Small Signal Enabled  
powerc[15:14] = 01,  
alf[15] = 1, ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Enabled During Sleep  
CMOS  
3.3  
6.1  
2.9  
5.5  
5.0 µs  
5.0 µs  
Small Signal  
*
T = CKI clock cycle for 1X input clock option or T = CKI clock cycle divided by M/(2N) for PLL clock option (see Section 4.12, Clock Synthesis).  
tL = PLL lock time (see Table 64, PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Register Settings).  
74  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
9 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)  
Table 65. Power Dissipation and Wake-Up Latency (continued)  
Typical Power Dissipation (mW)  
I/O Units ON I/O Units OFF  
powerc[7:4] = 0x0 powerc[7:4] = 0xf During Wake State) During Wake State)  
Wake-Up Latency  
Operating Mode  
(PLL Not Used (PLL Used  
(Unused inputs at VDD or VSS)  
VDD=  
3 V  
3 V  
3 V  
3 V  
Sleep with Slow Internal Clock  
Small Signal Disabled  
powerc[15:14] = 11,  
alf[15] = 1, ioc = 0x0180  
PLL Disabled During Sleep  
20 µs + tL†  
3T* + tL†  
0.40  
0.060  
0.060  
0.30  
0.060  
0.060  
20 µs  
3T*  
Small Signal  
Software Stop  
powerc[15:12] = 0011  
PLL Disabled During STOP  
CMOS  
Software Stop  
powerc[15:12] = 1111  
PLL Disabled During STOP  
20 µs + tL†  
20 µs  
Small Signal  
Hardware Stop (STOP = VSS)  
powerc[15:12] = 0000  
PLL Disabled During STOP  
CMOS  
0.060  
1.20  
0.060  
1.20  
3T*  
3T*  
Small Signal  
Hardware Stop (STOP = VSS)  
powerc[15:12] = 0000  
PLL Enabled During STOP  
CMOS  
2.5  
3.6  
2.5  
3.6  
3T*  
3T*  
3T*  
3T*  
Small Signal  
*
T = CKI clock cycle for 1X input clock option or T = CKI clock cycle divided by M/(2N) for PLL clock option (see Section 4.12, Clock Synthesis).  
tL = PLL lock time (see Table 64, PLL Electrical Specifications and pllc Register Settings).  
The power dissipation listed is for internal power dissipation only. Total power dissipation can be calculated on the  
basis of the application by adding C x VDD/2 x f for each output, where C is the additional load capacitance and f is  
the output frequency.  
Power dissipation due to the input buffers is highly dependent on the input voltage level. At full CMOS levels, es-  
sentially no dc current is drawn. However, for levels between the power supply rails, especially at or near the thresh-  
old of VDD/2, high currents can flow. Although input and I/O buffers may be left untied (since the input voltage levels  
of the input and I/O buffers are designed to remain at full CMOS levels when not driven by the DSP), it is still rec-  
ommended that unused input and I/O pins be tied to VSS or VDD through a 10 kresistor to avoid application am-  
biguities. Further, if I/O pins are tied high or low, they should be pulled fully to VSS or VDD.  
WARNING: The device needs to be clocked for at least six CKI cycles during reset after powerup. Other-  
wise, high currents may flow.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
75  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation  
The following timing characteristics and requirements are preliminary information and are subject to change. Timing  
characteristics refer to the behavior of the device under specified conditions. Timing requirements refer to conditions  
imposed on the user for proper operation of the device. All timing data is valid for the following conditions:  
TA = –40 °C to +85 °C (See Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions.)  
VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V (See Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions.)  
Capacitance load on outputs (CL) = 50 pF, except for CKO, where CL = 20 pF.  
Output characteristics can be derated as a function of load capacitance (CL).  
All outputs: 0.03 ns/pF dt/dCL 0.07 ns/pF for 10 CL 100 pF at VIH for rising edge and at VIL for falling edge.  
For example, if the actual load capacitance is 30 pF instead of 50 pF, the derating for a rising edge is (30 – 50) pF  
x 0.06 ns/pF = 1.2 ns less than the specified rise time or delay that includes a rise time.  
Test conditions for inputs:  
Rise and fall times of 4 ns or less  
Timing reference levels for delays = VIH, VIL  
Test conditions for outputs (unless noted otherwise):  
CLOAD = 50 pF; except for CKO, where CLOAD = 20 pF  
Timing reference levels for delays = VIH, VIL  
3-state delays measured to the high-impedance state of the output driver  
For the timing diagrams, see Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for  
input clock requirements.  
Unless otherwise noted, CKO in the timing diagrams is the free-running CKO.  
76  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.1 DSP Clock Generation (3.0 V Operation)  
t1  
t3  
t2  
1X CKI*  
t4  
t5  
CKO  
t6, t6a  
CKO  
EXTERNAL MEMORY CYCLE  
§
W = 1  
5-4009 (F).a  
*
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
§
Free-running clock.  
Wait-stated clock (see Table 38, ioc Register).  
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 12. I/O Clock Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 66. Timing Requirements for Input Clock (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Clock In Period (high to high)  
Clock In Low Time (low to high)  
Clock In High Time (high to low)  
Min  
20†  
10  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
ns  
10  
ns  
Device speeds greater than 50 MIPS do not support 1X operation. Use the PLL.  
Device is fully static, t1 is tested at 100 ns for 1X input clock option, and memory hold time is tested at 0.1 s.  
Table 67. Timing Characteristics for Input Clock and Output Clock (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Clock Out High Delay  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t4  
t5  
10  
10  
Clock Out Low Delay (high to low)  
Clock Out Period (low to low)  
T†  
ns  
t6  
ns  
t6a  
Clock Out Period with SLOWCKI Bit Set in powerc  
Register (low to low)  
0.74  
3.8  
µs  
T = internal clock period, set by CKI or by CKI and the PLL parameters.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
77  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.2 Reset Circuit (3.0 V Operation)  
The DSP1629 has two external reset pins: RSTB and TRST. At initial powerup, or if the supply voltage falls below  
VDD MIN* and a device reset is required, both TRST and RSTB must be asserted to initialize the device. Figure 13,  
Powerup Reset and Chip Reset Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation), shows two separate events:  
Chip reset at initial powerup.  
Chip reset following a drop in power supply.  
Note: The TRST pin must be asserted even if the JTAG controller is not used by the application.  
*
See Table 60, Recommended Operating Conditions.  
V
DD MIN  
t146  
VDD MIN  
VDD  
RAMP  
0.4 V  
t153  
t153  
t146  
0.4 V  
t9  
t9  
t8  
t8  
V
V
IH  
RSTB,  
TRST  
IL  
t10  
t11  
t11  
t10  
OUTPUT VOH  
PINS *  
V
OL  
CKI  
5-4010 (F).a  
*
When both INT0 and RSTB are asserted, all output and bidirectional pins (except TDO, which 3-states by JTAG control) are put in a 3-state  
condition. With RSTB asserted and INT0 not asserted, EROM, ERAMHI, ERAMLO, IO, and RWN outputs remain high, and CKO remains a  
free-running clock.  
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
Figure 13. Powerup Reset and Chip Reset Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 68. Timing Requirements for Powerup Reset and Chip Reset (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
RSTB and TRST Reset Pulse (low to high)  
VDD Ramp  
Min  
6T  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t8  
t9  
10  
ms  
t146  
VDD MIN to RSTB Low:  
CMOS  
2T  
20  
ns  
µs  
Small-signal  
t153  
RSTB (low to high)  
54  
ns  
Table 69. Timing Characteristics for Powerup Reset and Chip Reset (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
100  
100  
Unit  
ns  
t10  
t11  
RSTB Disable Time (low to 3-state)  
RSTB Enable Time (high to valid)  
ns  
Note: The device needs to be clocked for at least six CKI cycles during reset after powerup. Otherwise, high cur-  
rents may flow.  
78  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.3 Reset Synchronization (3.0 V Operation)  
t5 + 2 x t6  
VIH  
VIL  
*
CKI  
t126  
VIH  
VIL  
RSTB  
CKO  
VIH  
VIL  
VIH  
VIL  
CKO  
5-4011 (F).a  
*
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
Notes:  
CKO1 and CKO2 are two possible CKO states before reset. CKO is free-running.  
If the rising edge of RSTB (low to high) is captured instead by the falling edge of CKO (high to low), CKO and CKI will be in-phase at t5 + 2 x t6.  
Figure 14. Reset Synchronization Timing (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 70. Timing Requirements for Reset Synchronization Timing (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Reset Setup (high to high)  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t126  
3
T/2 – 1  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
79  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.4 JTAG I/O Specifications (3.0 V Operation)  
t12  
t155  
t13  
t14  
VIH  
VIL  
TCK  
TMS  
TDI  
t15  
t156  
t16  
t18  
VIH  
VIL  
t17  
VIH  
VIL  
t19  
t20  
VOH  
VOL  
TDO  
5-4017 (F)  
Figure 15. JTAG Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 71. Timing Requirements for JTAG Input/Output (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
TCK Period (high to high)  
Min  
50  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t12  
t13  
TCK High Time (high to low)  
22.5  
22.5  
0.6  
0.6  
7.5  
2
ns  
t14  
TCK Low Time (low to high)  
ns  
t155  
t156  
t15  
TCK Rise Transition Time (low to high)  
TCK Fall Transition Time (high to low)  
TMS Setup Time (valid to high)  
TMS Hold Time (high to invalid)  
TDI Setup Time (valid to high)  
TDI Hold Time (high to invalid)  
V/ns  
V/ns  
ns  
t16  
ns  
t17  
7.5  
2
ns  
t18  
ns  
Table 72. Timing Characteristics for JTAG Input/Output (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
TDO Delay (low to valid)  
TDO Hold (low to invalid)  
Min  
0
Max  
19  
Unit  
ns  
t19  
t20  
ns  
80  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.5 Interrupt (3.0 V Operation)  
V
OH  
OL  
*
CKO  
V
t21  
V
IH  
IL  
INT[1:0]  
V
t22  
t23  
t25  
t26  
V
OH  
OL  
IACK  
V
t24  
V
OH  
OL  
VEC[3:0]  
V
5-4018 (F)  
*
CKO is free-running.  
IACK assertion is guaranteed to be enclosed by VEC[3:0] assertion.  
Figure 16. Interrupt Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 73. Timing Requirements for Interrupt (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
19  
Max  
Unit  
t21  
t22  
Interrupt Setup (high to low)  
INT Assertion Time (high to low)  
ns  
ns  
2T  
Note: Interrupt is asserted during an interruptible instruction and no other pending interrupts.  
Table 74. Timing Characteristics for Interrupt (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
T/2 + 10  
12.5  
Unit  
ns  
t23  
t24  
t25  
t26  
IACK Assertion Time (low to high)  
VEC Assertion Time (low to high)  
IACK Invalid Time (low to low)  
VEC Invalid Time (low to low)  
ns  
10  
ns  
12.5  
ns  
Note: Interrupt is asserted during an interruptible instruction and no other pending interrupts.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
81  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.6 Bit Input/Output (BIO) (3.0 V Operation)  
t144  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t29  
IOBIT  
(OUTPUT)  
VOH  
VOL  
VALID OUTPUT  
t28  
t27  
VIH  
VIL  
IOBIT  
(INPUT)  
DATA INPUT  
5-4019 (F).a  
Figure 17. Write Outputs Followed by Read Inputs (cbit = Immediate; a1 = sbit) (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 75. Timing Requirements for BIO Input Read (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
15  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t27  
t28  
IOBIT Input Setup Time (valid to high)  
IOBIT Input Hold Time (high to invalid)  
ns  
Table 76. Timing Characteristics for BIO Output (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
1
Max  
9
Unit  
ns  
t29  
IOBIT Output Valid Time (low to valid)  
IOBIT Output Hold Time (low to invalid)  
t144  
ns  
t144  
VOH–  
CKO  
VOL–  
t29  
IOBIT  
(OUTPUT)  
VOH–  
VOL–  
VALID OUTPUT  
t142  
t141  
VIH–  
VIL–  
IOBIT  
(INPUT)  
TEST INPUT  
5-4019 (F).b  
Figure 18. Write Outputs and Test Inputs (cbit = Immediate) (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 77. Timing Requirements for BIO Input Test (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
15  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t141  
t142  
IOBIT Input Setup Time (valid to low)  
IOBIT Input Hold Time (low to invalid)  
ns  
82  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.7 External Memory Interface (3.0 V Operation)  
The following timing diagrams, characteristics, and requirements do not apply to interactions with delayed external  
memory enables unless so stated. See the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital Signal Processor Information Manual  
for a detailed description of the external memory interface, including other functional diagrams.  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t33  
t34  
VOH  
VOL  
*
ENABLE  
W = 0  
5-4020 (F).b  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 19. Enable Transition Timing (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 78. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Enables (EROM, ERAMHI, IO, ERAMLO) (3.0 V Oper-  
ation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
4.5  
4
Unit  
ns  
t33  
t34  
CKO to ENABLE Active (low to low)  
CKO to ENABLE Inactive (low to high)  
–1  
ns  
Table 79. Timing Characteristics for Delayed External Memory Enables (ioc = 0x000F) (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t33  
CKO to Delayed ENABLE Active (low to low)  
T/2  
T/2 + 7  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
83  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0 x 2222)  
W* = 2  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t127  
VOH  
ENABLE  
VOL  
t129  
t130  
VIH  
DB  
AB  
READ DATA  
VIL  
t150  
t128  
VOH  
VOL  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4021 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 20. External Memory Data Read Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 80. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Access (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Enable Width (low to high)  
Min  
T(1 + W) – 1.5  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t127  
t128  
2
Address Valid (enable low to valid)  
ns  
Table 81. Timing Requirements for External Memory Read (EROM, ERAMHI, IO, ERAMLO) (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
12  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t129  
t130  
t150  
Read Data Setup (valid to enable high)  
Read Data Hold (enable high to hold)  
External Memory Access Time (valid to valid)  
ns  
T(1 + W) – 13  
ns  
84  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0x1002)  
W* = 2  
W* = 1  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
VOH  
ERAMLO  
VOL  
VOH  
DB  
WRITE DATA  
READ  
VOL  
t131  
VOH  
VOL  
EROM  
t132  
t133  
t136  
t134  
VOH  
VOL  
RWN  
AB  
t135  
VOH  
VOL  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4022 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 21. External Memory Data Write Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 82. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Data Write (All Enables) (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
0
Unit  
ns  
t131  
t132  
t133  
t134  
t135  
t136  
Write Overlap (enable low to 3-state)  
RWN Advance (RWN high to enable high)  
RWN Delay (enable low to RWN low)  
Write Data Setup (data valid to RWN high)  
RWN Width (low to high)  
0
ns  
0
ns  
T(1 + W)/2 – 3  
T(1 + W) – 4  
0
ns  
ns  
Write Address Setup (address valid to RWN low)  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
85  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0x1002)  
W* = 1  
W* = 2  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
VOH  
ERAMLO  
VOL  
VOH  
EROM  
VOL  
t131  
VOH  
DB  
WRITE  
READ  
VOL  
t137  
t138  
VOH  
VOL  
RWN  
t139  
VOH  
VOL  
AB  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4023 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 22. Write Cycle Followed by Read Cycle (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 83. Timing Characteristics for Write Cycle Followed by Read Cycle (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t131  
t137  
t138  
t139  
Write Overlap (enable low to 3-state)  
Write Data 3-state (RWN high to 3-state)  
Write Data Hold (RWN high to data hold)  
Write Address Hold (RWN high to address hold)  
0
2
ns  
ns  
0
ns  
86  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.8 PHIF Specifications (3.0 V Operation)  
For the PHIF, read means read by the external user (output by the DSP); write is similarly defined. The 8-bit reads/writes  
are identical to one-half of a 16-bit access.  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
V
IH–  
IL–  
PCSN  
PODS  
V
V
IH–  
IL–  
V
t41  
t42  
t44  
V
IH–  
IL–  
PIDS  
PBSEL  
PSTAT  
V
t43  
t47  
V
IH–  
IL–  
V
t45  
t48  
t52  
t46  
V
IH–  
IL–  
V
t51  
t50  
t154  
t49  
V
IH–  
IL–  
PB[7:0]  
V
5-4036 (F)  
Figure 23. PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (Read and Write) Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 84. Timing Requirements for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
Unit  
t41  
t42  
PODS to PCSN Setup (low to low)  
PCSN to PODS Hold (high to high)  
PIDS to PCSN Setup (low to low)  
PCSN to PIDS Hold (high to high)  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
PB Write to PCSN Setup (valid to high)  
PCSN to PB Write Hold (high to invalid)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0
t43  
0
t44  
0
t45*  
t46*  
t47*  
t48*  
t51*  
t52*  
4
0
6
0
10  
4
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can also be  
initiated and completed with the PIDS and PODS signals. An output transaction (read) is initiated by PCSN or PODS going low, whichever comes  
last. For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PODS going low, if PODS goes low  
after PCSN. An output transaction is completed by PCSN or PODS going high, whichever comes first. An input transaction is initiated by PCSN or  
PIDS going low, whichever comes last. An input transaction is completed by PCSN or PIDS going high, whichever comes first. All requirements  
referenced to PCSN apply to PIDS or PODS, if PIDS or PODS is the controlling signal.  
Table 85. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
t49*  
t50*  
t154  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
ns  
8
ns  
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can also  
be initiated and completed with the PIDS and PODS signals. An output transaction (read) is initiated by PCSN or PODS going low, whichever  
comes last. For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PODS going low, if PODS  
goes low after PCSN. An output transaction is completed by PCSN or PODS going high, whichever comes first. An input transaction is initiated  
by PCSN or PIDS going low, whichever comes last. An input transaction is completed by PCSN or PIDS going high, whichever comes first. All  
requirements referenced to PCSN apply to PIDS or PODS, if PIDS or PODS is the controlling signal.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
87  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
8-bit READ  
8-bit WRITE  
t55  
t55  
V
IH  
PCSN  
V
IL  
t56  
t56  
t55  
t56  
V
IH  
PODS  
PIDS  
V
IL  
t56  
t55  
VIH  
V
IL  
t56  
V
OH  
PBSEL  
POBE  
PIBF  
V
OL  
t53  
t53  
V
OH  
VOL  
t54  
t54  
VOH  
VOL  
5-4037 (F).a  
Figure 24. PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (Pulse Period and Flags) Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 86. Timing Requirements for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
20.5  
20.5  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t55  
t56  
PCSN/PODS/PIDS Pulse Width (high to low)  
PCSN/PODS/PIDS Pulse Width (low to high)  
ns  
Table 87. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN/PODS to POBE(high to high)  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t53*  
17  
ns  
PCSN/PIDS to PIBF(high to high)  
t54*  
17  
ns  
*
t53 should be referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS, whichever comes first. t54 should be referenced to the rising edge of PCSN  
or PIDS, whichever comes first.  
POBE and PIBF may be programmed to be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram (positive assertion levels shown). t53 and t54  
apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
88  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
VIH —  
PCSN  
VIL —  
t42  
VIH —  
PDS  
VIL —  
t41  
t43  
t44  
VIH —  
PRWN  
VIL —  
t43  
t45  
t44  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PBSEL  
t47  
t48  
t52  
t46  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PSTAT  
PB[7:0]  
t49  
t50  
t154  
t51  
VIH —  
VIL —  
5-4038 (F).a  
Figure 25. PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (Read and Write) Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 88. Timing Requirements for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
PDSto PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
t41  
0
ns  
ns  
PCSN to PDSHold (high to invalid)  
PRWN to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PRWN Hold (high to invalid)  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
PB Write to PCSN Setup (valid to high)  
PCSN to PB Write Hold (high to invalid)  
t42  
0
t43  
t44  
4
0
4
0
6
0
10  
4
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t45*  
t46*  
t47*  
t48*  
t51*  
t52*  
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PDS signal. An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last.  
For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PDS going low, if PDS goes low  
after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first. All requirements referenced to  
PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or complete a transaction.  
PDS is programmable to be active-high or active-low. It is shown active-low in Figures 49 and 50. POBE and PIBF may be programmed to  
be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram. t53 and t54 apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
Table 89. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
t49*  
t50*  
t154  
8
ns  
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PDS signal. An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last.  
For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PDS going low, if PDS goes low  
after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first. All requirements referenced to  
PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or complete a transaction.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
89  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
8-bit READ  
8-bit WRITE  
t55  
t55  
V
IH  
PCSN  
V
IL  
t56  
t56  
t55  
t56  
V
IH  
PDS  
V
IL  
t56  
t55  
V
IH  
PIDS  
V
IL  
t56  
V
OH  
PBSEL  
POBE  
PIBF  
V
OL–  
t53  
t53  
VOH  
V
OL  
t54  
t54  
VOH  
V
OL  
5-4039 (F).a  
Figure 26. PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (Pulse Period and Flags) Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 90. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN/PDSto POBE(high to high)  
PCSN/PDSto PIBF(high to high)  
Min  
Max  
17  
Unit  
ns  
t53*  
t54*  
17  
ns  
*
An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last. For example, t53 and t54 should be referenced to  
PDS going low, if PDS goes low after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first.  
All requirements referenced to PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or  
complete a transaction.  
PDS is programmable to be active-high or active-low. It is shown active-low in Figures 49 and 50. POBE and PIBF may be programmed to  
be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram. t53 and t54 apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
Table 91. Timing Requirements for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
20  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t55  
t56  
PCSN/PDS/PRWN Pulse Width (high to low)  
PCSN/PDS/PRWN Pulse Width (low to high)  
20  
ns  
90  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
VIH —  
PCSN  
VIL —  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PODS (PDS*)  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PIDS (PRWN*)  
t47  
t48  
t46  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PBSEL  
t45  
VIH —  
VIL —  
PSTAT  
t50  
t154  
t49  
VIH —  
PB[7:0]  
VIL —  
5-4040 (F).a  
*
Motorola mode signal name.  
Figure 27. PHIF Intel or Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 92. Timing Requirements for Intel and Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) (3.0 V Opera-  
tion)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
4
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t45†  
t46‡  
t47†  
t48‡  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
0
ns  
6
ns  
0
ns  
t45, t47, and t49 are referenced to the falling edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs last.  
t46, t48, and t50 are referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs first.  
Table 93. Timing Characteristics for Intel and Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) (3.0 V Oper-  
ation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
t49†  
t50‡  
t154  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
ns  
8
ns  
t45, t47, and t49 are referenced to the falling edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs last.  
t46, t48, t154, and t50 are referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs first.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
91  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
VIH–  
RSTB  
VIL–  
t57  
VOH–  
POBE  
VOL–  
t58  
VOH–  
PIBF  
VOL–  
5-4775 (F)  
Figure 28. PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Reset Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 94. PHIF Timing Characteristics for PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Reset (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
3
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t57  
t58  
RSTB Disable to POBE/PIBF* (high to valid)  
RSTB Enable to POBE/PIBF* (low to invalid)  
25  
25  
ns  
*
After reset, POBE and PIBF always go to the levels shown, indicating output buffer empty and input buffer empty. The DSP program, however,  
may later invert the definition of the logic levels for POBE and PIBF. t57 and t58 continue to apply.  
VIH–  
CKO  
VIL–  
t59  
VOH–  
VOL–  
POBE  
t59  
VOH–  
VOL–  
PIBF  
5-4776 (F)  
POBE and PIBF can be programmed to be active-high or active-low. They are shown active-high. The timing characteristic for active-low is  
the same as for active-high.  
Figure 29. PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Disable Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 95. PHIF Timing Characteristics for POBE and PIBF Disable (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t59  
CKO to POBE/PIBF Disable (high/low to disable)  
20  
ns  
92  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.9 Serial I/O Specifications (3.0 V Operation)  
t70  
t72  
t75  
t71  
t74  
VIH–  
VIL–  
ICK  
t73  
t75  
VIH–  
VIL–  
ILD  
DI  
t77  
t78  
VIH–  
VIL–  
B0  
B1  
BN – 1*  
t79  
B0  
VOH–  
VOL–  
IBF  
5-4777 (F)  
*
N = 16 bits or 8 bits.  
Figure 30. SIO Passive Mode Input Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 96. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Clock Period (high to high)†  
Clock Low Time (low to high)  
Clock High Time (high to low)  
Load High Setup (high to high)  
Load Low Setup (low to high)  
Load High Hold (high to invalid)  
Data Setup (valid to high)  
Min  
40  
18  
18  
8
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t70  
t71  
t72  
t73  
t74  
t75  
t77  
t78  
8
0
7
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
0
For multiprocessor mode, see note in Section 11.10, Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation).  
Device is fully static; t70 is tested at 200 ns.  
Table 97. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
35  
Unit  
t79  
IBF Delay (high to high)  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
93  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
ICK  
VOL–  
t101  
t76a  
VOH–  
ILD  
VOL–  
*
t77  
t78  
VIH–  
VIL–  
DI  
B0  
B1  
BN – 1  
t79  
B0  
VOH–  
VOL–  
IBF  
5-4778 (F)  
*
ILD goes high during bit 6 (of 0:15); N = 8 or 16.  
Figure 31. SIO Active Mode Input Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 98. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Data Setup (valid to high)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Min  
7
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t77  
t78  
0
ns  
Table 99. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
ILD Delay (high to low)  
ILD Hold (high to invalid)  
IBF Delay (high to high)  
Min  
3
Max  
35  
Unit  
ns  
t76a  
t101  
t79  
ns  
35  
ns  
94  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
t80  
t82  
t85  
t81  
t84  
VIH–  
VIL–  
OCK  
t83  
t85  
VIH–  
VIL–  
OLD  
DO*  
t88  
t94  
t87  
B0  
t90  
B1  
t90  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
B7  
BN – 1  
AS7  
t89  
t95  
t92  
AD0  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SADD  
DOEN  
OBE  
AD7  
AD1  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t96  
VOH–  
VOL–  
5-4796 (F)  
*
See sioc register, MSB field, to determine if B0 is the MSB or LSB. See sioc register, ILEN field, to determine if the DO word length is 8 bits  
or 16 bits.  
Figure 32. SIO Passive Mode Output Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 100. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Clock Period (high to high)†  
Clock Low Time (low to high)  
Clock High Time (high to low)  
Load High Setup (high to high)  
Load Low Setup (low to high)  
Load Hold (high to invalid)  
t80  
40  
ns  
t81  
t82  
t83  
t84  
t85  
18  
18  
8
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
8
0
For multiprocessor mode, see note in Section 11.10, Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation).  
Device is fully static; t80 is tested at 200 ns.  
Table 101. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
3
Max  
35  
35  
35  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t87  
t88  
t89  
t90  
t92  
t93  
t94  
t95  
t96  
Data Delay (high to valid)  
Enable Data Delay (low to active)  
Disable Data Delay (high to 3-state)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Address Delay (high to valid)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Enable Delay (low to active)  
Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
OBE Delay (high to high)  
3
35  
35  
35  
35  
Agere Systems Inc.  
95  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
OCK  
VOL–  
t102  
t86a  
VOH–  
OLD  
*
VOL–  
t88  
t94  
t87  
B0  
t90  
B1  
t90  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
DO  
B7  
BN – 1  
AS7  
t89  
t95  
t92  
AD0  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SADD  
DOEN  
OBE  
AD7  
AD1  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t96  
VOH–  
VOL–  
5-4797 (F)  
*
OLD goes high at the end of bit 6 of 0:15.  
Figure 33. SIO Active Mode Output Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 102. Timing Characteristics for Serial Output (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
OLD Delay (high to low)  
Min  
3
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t86a  
t102  
t87  
t88  
t89  
t90  
t92  
t93  
t94  
t95  
t96  
35  
35  
35  
35  
35  
35  
35  
35  
OLD Hold (high to invalid)  
Data Delay (high to valid)  
3
Enable Data Delay (low to active)  
Disable Data Delay (high to 3-state)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Address Delay (high to valid)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Enable Delay (low to active)  
Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
OBE Delay (high to high)  
3
96  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
CKO  
VOL–  
t97  
t99  
t98  
VOH–  
VOL–  
ICK  
t100  
VOH–  
VOL–  
OCK  
VOH–  
ICK/OCK*  
t76a  
t101  
t76b  
t101  
VOH–  
VOL–  
ILD  
t86a  
t102  
t86b  
t102  
VOH–  
VOL–  
OLD  
t104  
t105  
t103  
t105  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SYNC  
5-4798 (F)  
*
See sioc register, LD field.  
Figure 34. Serial I/O Active Mode Clock Timing (3.0 V Operation)  
Table 103. Timing Characteristics for Signal Generation (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
3
Max  
18  
18  
18  
18  
35  
35  
Unit  
t97  
ICK Delay (high to high)  
ICK Delay (high to low)  
OCK Delay (high to high)  
OCK Delay (high to low)  
ILD Delay (high to low)  
ILD Delay (high to high)  
ILD Hold (high to invalid)  
OLD Delay (high to low)  
OLD Delay (high to high)  
OLD Hold (high to invalid)  
SYNC Delay (high to low)  
SYNC Delay (high to high)  
SYNC Hold (high to invalid)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t98  
t99  
t100  
t76a  
t76b  
t101  
t86a  
t86b  
t102  
t103  
t104  
t105  
3
35  
35  
3
35  
35  
Agere Systems Inc.  
97  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
10 Timing Characteristics for 3.0 V Operation (continued)  
10.10 Multiprocessor Communication (3.0 V Operation)  
TIME SLOT 1  
TIME SLOT 2  
OCK/ICK  
t113  
t112  
t112  
t113  
VIH–  
VIL–  
SYNC  
*
t116  
B1  
t117  
VOH–  
VOL–  
B15  
B0  
B7  
B8  
B15  
AS7  
B0  
DO/D1  
SADD  
t114  
t122  
t120  
t121  
AD0 AD1  
t115  
AD7 AS0  
AD0  
t120  
VOH–  
VOL–  
DOEN  
5-4799 (F)  
*
Negative edge initiates time slot 0.  
Figure 35. SIO Multiprocessor Timing Diagram (3.0 V Operation)  
Note: All serial I/O timing requirements and characteristics still apply, but the minimum clock period in passive  
multiprocessor mode, assuming 50% duty cycle, is calculated as (t77 + t116) 2.  
*
Table 104. Timing Requirements for SIO Multiprocessor Communication (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Sync Setup (high/low to high)  
Sync Hold (high to high/low)  
Address Setup (valid to high)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Min  
35  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t112  
t113  
t114  
t115  
ns  
12  
0
ns  
ns  
Table 105. Timing Characteristics for SIO Multiprocessor Communication (3.0 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference†  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
35  
Unit  
ns  
t116  
t117  
t120  
t121  
t122  
Data Delay (bit 0 only) (low to valid)  
Data Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
DOEN Valid Delay (high to valid)  
Address Delay (bit 0 only) (low to valid)  
Address Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
30  
ns  
25  
ns  
35  
ns  
30  
ns  
With capacitance load on ICK, OCK, DO, SYNC, and SADD = 100 pF, add 4 ns to t116—t122.  
98  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation  
The following timing characteristics and requirements are preliminary information and are subject to change. Timing  
characteristics refer to the behavior of the device under specified conditions. Timing requirements refer to conditions  
imposed on the user for proper operation of the device. All timing data is valid for the following conditions:  
TA = –40 °C to +85 °C (See Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions.)  
VDD = 3 V ± 10%, VSS = 0 V (See Section 8.3, Recommended Operating Conditions.)  
Capacitance load on outputs (CL) = 50 pF, except for CKO, where CL = 20 pF.  
Output characteristics can be derated as a function of load capacitance (CL).  
All outputs: 0.03 ns/pF dt/dCL 0.07 ns/pF for 10 CL 100 pF at VIH for rising edge and at VIL for falling edge.  
For example, if the actual load capacitance is 30 pF instead of 50 pF, the derating for a rising edge is (30 – 50) pF  
x 0.06 ns/pF = 1.2 ns less than the specified rise time or delay that includes a rise time.  
Test conditions for inputs:  
Rise and fall times of 4 ns or less  
Timing reference levels for delays = VIH, VIL  
Test conditions for outputs (unless noted otherwise):  
CLOAD = 50 pF; except for CKO, where CLOAD = 20 pF  
Timing reference levels for delays = VIH, VIL  
3-state delays measured to the high-impedance state of the output driver  
For the timing diagrams, see Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for  
input clock requirements.  
Unless otherwise noted, CKO in the timing diagrams is the free-running CKO.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
99  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.1 DSP Clock Generation (2.7 V Operation)  
t1  
t3  
t2  
1X CKI*  
t4  
t5  
CKO  
t6, t6a  
CKO  
EXTERNAL MEMORY CYCLE  
§
W = 1  
5-4009 (F).a  
*
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
§
Free-running clock.  
Wait-stated clock (see Table 38, ioc Register).  
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 36. I/O Clock Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 106. Timing Requirements for Input Clock (2.7 V Operation)  
19.2 ns and 12.5 ns†  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t1  
Clock In Period (high to high)  
20  
ns  
t2  
t3  
Clock In Low Time (low to high)  
Clock In High Time (high to low)  
10  
10  
ns  
ns  
Device speeds greater than 50 MIPS do not support 1X operation. Use the PLL.  
Device is fully static, t1 is tested at 100 ns for 1X input clock option, and memory hold time is tested at 0.1 s.  
Table 107. Timing Characteristics for Input Clock and Output Clock (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
19.2 ns  
12.5 ns  
Unit  
Min  
Max  
14  
Min  
Max  
10  
t4  
t5  
Clock Out High Delay  
T†  
T†  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
Clock Out Low Delay (high to low)  
Clock Out Period (low to low)  
14  
10  
t6  
t6a  
Clock Out Period with SLOWCKI Bit Set 0.74  
in powerc Register (low to low)  
3.8  
0.74  
3.8  
T = internal clock period, set by CKI or by CKI and the PLL parameters.  
100  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.2 Reset Circuit (2.7 V Operation)  
The DSP1629 has two external reset pins: RSTB and TRST. At initial powerup, or if the supply voltage falls below  
VDD MIN* and a device reset is required, both TRST and RSTB must be asserted to initialize the device. Figure 37,  
Powerup Reset and Chip Reset Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation), shows two separate events:  
Chip reset at initial powerup.  
Chip reset following a drop in power supply.  
Note: The TRST pin must be asserted even if the JTAG controller is not used by the application.  
*
See Table 60, Recommended Operating Conditions.  
V
DD MIN  
t146  
VDD MIN  
VDD  
RAMP  
0.4 V  
t153  
t153  
t146  
0.4 V  
t9  
t9  
t8  
t8  
V
V
IH  
RSTB,  
TRST  
IL  
t10  
t11  
t11  
t10  
OUTPUT VOH  
PINS*  
V
OL  
CKI  
5-4010 (F).a  
*
When both INT0 and RSTB are asserted, all output and bidirectional pins (except TDO, which 3-states by JTAG control) are put in a 3-state  
condition. With RSTB asserted and INT0 not asserted, EROM, ERAMHI, ERAMLO, IO, and RWN outputs remain high, and CKO remains a  
free-running clock.  
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
Figure 37. Powerup Reset and Chip Reset Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 108. Timing Requirements for Powerup Reset and Chip Reset (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
RSTB and TRST Reset Pulse (low to high)  
VDD Ramp  
Min  
6T  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t8  
t9  
10  
ms  
t146  
VDD MIN to RSTB Low:  
CMOS  
2T  
20  
ns  
µs  
Small-signal  
t153  
RSTB (low to high)  
54  
ns  
Table 109. Timing Characteristics for Powerup Reset and Chip Reset (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
100  
100  
Unit  
ns  
t10  
t11  
RSTB Disable Time (low to 3-state)  
RSTB Enable Time (high to valid)  
ns  
Note: The device needs to be clocked for at least six CKI cycles during reset after powerup. Otherwise, high currents may flow.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
101  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.3 Reset Synchronization (2.7 V Operation)  
t5 + 2 x t6  
VIH  
VIL  
*
CKI  
t126  
VIH  
VIL  
RSTB  
CKO  
VIH  
VIL  
VIH  
VIL  
CKO  
5-4011 (F).a  
*
See Table 62, Electrical Requirements for Mask-Programmable Input Clock Options, for input clock electrical requirements.  
Notes:  
CKO1 and CKO2 are two possible CKO states before reset. CKO is free-running.  
If the rising edge of RSTB (low to high) is captured instead by the falling edge of CKO (high to low), CKO and CKI will be in-phase at t5 + 2 x t6.  
Figure 38. Reset Synchronization Timing (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 110. Timing Requirements for Reset Synchronization Timing (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Reset Setup (high to high)  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t126  
3
T/2 – 1  
ns  
102  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.4 JTAG I/O Specifications (2.7 V Operation)  
t12  
t155  
t13  
t14  
VIH  
VIL  
TCK  
TMS  
TDI  
t15  
t156  
t16  
t18  
VIH  
VIL  
t17  
VIH  
VIL  
t19  
t20  
VOH  
VOL  
TDO  
5-4017 (F)  
Figure 39. JTAG Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 111. Timing Requirements for JTAG Input/Output (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
50  
Max  
Unit  
t12  
t13  
TCK Period (high to high)  
ns  
ns  
TCK High Time (high to low)  
22.5  
22.5  
0.6  
0.6  
7.5  
2
t14  
TCK Low Transition Time (low to high)  
TCK Rise Transition Time (low to high)  
TCK Fall Transition Time (high to low)  
TMS Setup Time (valid to high)  
TMS Hold Time (high to invalid)  
TDI Setup Time (valid to high)  
TDI Hold Time (high to invalid)  
ns  
t155  
t156  
t15  
V/ns  
V/ns  
ns  
t16  
ns  
t17  
7.5  
2
ns  
t18  
ns  
Table 112. Timing Characteristics for JTAG Input/Output (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
TDO Delay (low to valid)  
TDO Hold (low to invalid)  
Min  
0
Max  
19  
Unit  
ns  
t19  
t20  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
103  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.5 Interrupt (2.7 V Operation)  
V
OH  
OL  
*
CKO  
V
t21  
V
IH  
IL  
INT[1:0]  
V
t22  
t23  
t25  
t26  
V
OH  
OL  
IACK  
V
t24  
V
OH  
OL  
VEC[3:0]  
V
5-4018 (F)  
*
CKO is free-running.  
IACK assertion is guaranteed to be enclosed by VEC[3:0] assertion.  
Figure 40. Interrupt Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 113. Timing Requirements for Interrupt (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
19  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t21  
t22  
Interrupt Setup (high to low)  
INT Assertion Time (high to low)  
2T  
ns  
Note: Interrupt is asserted during an interruptible instruction and no other pending interrupts.  
Table 114. Timing Characteristics for Interrupt (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t23  
t24  
t25  
t26  
IACK Assertion Time (low to high)  
VEC Assertion Time (low to high)  
IACK Invalid Time (low to low)  
VEC Invalid Time (low to low)  
T/2 + 10  
12.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10  
12.5  
Note: Interrupt is asserted during an interruptible instruction and no other pending interrupts.  
104  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.6 Bit Input/Output (BIO) (2.7 V Operation)  
t144  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t29  
IOBIT  
(OUTPUT)  
VOH  
VOL  
VALID OUTPUT  
t28  
t27  
VIH  
VIL  
IOBIT  
(INPUT)  
DATA INPUT  
5-4019 (F).a  
Figure 41. Write Outputs Followed by Read Inputs (cbit = Immediate; a1 = sbit) (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 115. Timing Requirements for BIO Input Read (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
15  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t27  
t28  
IOBIT Input Setup Time (valid to high)  
IOBIT Input Hold Time (high to invalid)  
ns  
Table 116. Timing Characteristics for BIO Output (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
1
Max  
9
Unit  
ns  
t29  
IOBIT Output Valid Time (low to valid)  
IOBIT Output Hold Time (low to invalid)  
t144  
ns  
t144  
VOH–  
CKO  
VOL–  
t29  
IOBIT  
(OUTPUT)  
VOH–  
VOL–  
VALID OUTPUT  
t142  
t141  
VIH–  
VIL–  
IOBIT  
(INPUT)  
TEST INPUT  
5-4019 (F).b  
Figure 42. Write Outputs and Test Inputs (cbit = Immediate) (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 117. Timing Requirements for BIO Input Test (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
15  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t141  
t142  
IOBIT Input Setup Time (valid to low)  
IOBIT Input Hold Time (low to invalid)  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
105  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.7 External Memory Interface (2.7 V Operation)  
The following timing diagrams, characteristics, and requirements do not apply to interactions with delayed external  
memory enables unless so stated. See the DSP1611/17/18/27/28/29 Digital Signal Processor Information Manual  
for a detailed description of the external memory interface, including other functional diagrams.  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t33  
t34  
VOH  
VOL  
*
ENABLE  
W = 0  
5-4020 (F).b  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 43. Enable Transition Timing (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 118. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Enables (EROM, ERAMHI, IO, ERAMLO) (2.7 V Oper-  
ation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
5
Unit  
ns  
t33  
t34  
CKO to ENABLE Active (low to low)  
CKO to ENABLE Inactive (low to high)  
–1  
4.5  
ns  
Table 119. Timing Characteristics for Delayed External Memory Enables (ioc = 0x000F) (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t33  
CKO to Delayed ENABLE Active (low to low)  
T/2  
T/2 + 7  
ns  
106  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0 x 2222)  
W* = 2  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
t127  
VOH  
ENABLE  
VOL  
t129  
t130  
VIH  
DB  
AB  
READ DATA  
VIL  
t150  
t128  
VOH  
VOL  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4021 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 44. External Memory Data Read Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 120. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Access (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
T(1 + W) – 1.5  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t127  
t128  
Enable Width (low to high)  
Address Valid (enable low to valid)  
2.5  
ns  
Table 121. Timing Requirements for External Memory Read (EROM, ERAMHI, IO, ERAMLO) (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated  
Reference  
Parameter  
19.2 ns  
Max  
12.5 ns  
Max  
Unit  
Min  
15  
0
Min  
13  
0
t129  
t130  
t150  
Read Data Setup (valid to enable high)  
Read Data Hold (enable high to hold)  
External Memory Access Time (valid to valid)  
ns  
ns  
T(1 + W) – 15  
T(1 + W) – 14 ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
107  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0x1002)  
W* = 2  
W* = 1  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
VOH  
ERAMLO  
VOL  
VOH  
DB  
WRITE DATA  
READ  
VOL  
t131  
VOH  
VOL  
EROM  
t132  
t133  
t136  
t134  
VOH  
VOL  
RWN  
AB  
t135  
VOH  
VOL  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4022 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 45. External Memory Data Write Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 122. Timing Characteristics for External Memory Data Write (All Enables) (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated  
Reference  
Parameter  
19.2 ns  
Min  
12.5 ns  
Min  
Unit  
Max  
0
Max  
0
t131  
t132  
t133  
t134  
t135  
t136  
Write Overlap (enable low to 3-state)  
RWN Advance (RWN high to enable high)  
RWN Delay (enable low to RWN low)  
Write Data Setup (data valid to RWN high)  
RWN Width (low to high)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0
0
0
0
T(1 + W)/2 – 4  
T(1 + W) – 5  
0
T(1 + W)/2 – 3  
T(1 + W) – 4  
0
Write Address Setup (address valid to RWN low)  
108  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
(MWAIT = 0x1002)  
W* = 1  
W* = 2  
VOH  
CKO  
VOL  
VOH  
ERAMLO  
VOL  
VOH  
EROM  
VOL  
t131  
VOH  
DB  
WRITE  
READ  
VOL  
t137  
t138  
VOH  
VOL  
RWN  
t139  
VOH  
VOL  
AB  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
5-4023 (F).a  
*
W = number of wait-states.  
Figure 46. Write Cycle Followed by Read Cycle (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 123. Timing Characteristics for Write Cycle Followed by Read Cycle (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
0
Unit  
ns  
t131  
t137  
t138  
t139  
Write Overlap (enable low to 3-state)  
Write Data 3-state (RWN high to 3-state)  
Write Data Hold (RWN high to data hold)  
Write Address Hold (RWN high to address hold)  
2
ns  
ns  
0
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
109  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.8 PHIF Specifications (2.7 V Operation)  
For the PHIF, read means read by the external user (output by the DSP); write is similarly defined. The 8-bit reads/  
writes are identical to one-half of a 16-bit access.  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
VIH–  
PCSN  
PODS  
V
IL–  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t41  
t42  
t44  
VIH–  
PIDS  
PBSEL  
PSTAT  
V
IL–  
t43  
t47  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t45  
t48  
t52  
t46  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t50  
t154  
t51  
t49  
VIH–  
PB[7:0]  
VIL–  
5-4036 (F)  
Figure 47. PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (Read and Write) Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 124. Timing Requirements for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t41  
t42  
PODS to PCSN Setup (low to low)  
PCSN to PODS Hold (high to high)  
PIDS to PCSN Setup (low to low)  
PCSN to PIDS Hold (high to high)  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
PB Write to PCSN Setup (valid to high)  
PCSN to PB Write Hold (high to invalid)  
0
t43  
0
t44  
0
t45*  
t46*  
t47*  
t48*  
t51*  
t52*  
4
0
6
0
10  
4
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PIDS and PODS signals. An output transaction (read) is initiated by PCSN or PODS going low, which-  
ever comes last. For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PODS going low,  
if PODS goes low after PCSN. An output transaction is completed by PCSN or PODS going high, whichever comes first. An input transaction  
is initiated by PCSN or PIDS going low, whichever comes last. An input transaction is completed by PCSN or PIDS going high, whichever  
comes first. All requirements referenced to PCSN apply to PIDS or PODS, if PIDS or PODS is the controlling signal.  
Table 125. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
t49*  
t50*  
t154  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
ns  
8
ns  
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PIDS and PODS signals. An output transaction (read) is initiated by PCSN or PODS going low, which-  
ever comes last. For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PODS going low,  
if PODS goes low after PCSN. An output transaction is completed by PCSN or PODS going high, whichever comes first. An input transaction  
is initiated by PCSN or PIDS going low, whichever comes last. An input transaction is completed by PCSN or PIDS going high, whichever  
comes first. All requirements referenced to PCSN apply to PIDS or PODS, if PIDS or PODS is the controlling signal.  
110  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
8-bit READ  
8-bit WRITE  
t55  
t55  
V
IH  
PCSN  
V
IL  
t56  
t56  
t55  
t56  
V
IH  
PODS  
PIDS  
V
IL  
t56  
t55  
VIH  
V
IL  
t56  
V
OH  
PBSEL  
POBE  
PIBF  
V
OL  
t53  
t53  
VOH  
V
OL  
t54  
t54  
VOH  
V
OL  
5-4037 (F).a  
Figure 48. PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (Pulse Period and Flags) Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 126. Timing Requirements for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
20.5  
20.5  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t55  
t56  
PCSN/PODS/PIDS Pulse Width (high to low)  
PCSN/PODS/PIDS Pulse Width (low to high)  
ns  
Table 127. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Intel Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN/PODS to POBE(high to high)  
PCSN/PIDS to PIBF(high to high)  
Min  
Max  
17  
Unit  
ns  
t53*  
t54*  
17  
ns  
*
t53 should be referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS, whichever comes first. t54 should be referenced to the rising edge of  
PCSN or PIDS, whichever comes first.  
POBE and PIBF may be programmed to be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram (positive assertion levels shown). t53 and  
t54 apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
111  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
V
IH  
PCSN  
PDS  
V
IL  
t42  
V
IH  
V
IL  
t41  
t43  
t43  
t44  
V
IH  
PRWN  
PBSEL  
V
IL  
t44  
V
IH  
V
IL  
t47  
t48  
t52  
t45  
t46  
V
V
IH  
PSTAT  
PB[7:0]  
IL  
t49  
t50  
t154  
t51  
5-4038 (F).a  
Figure 49. PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (Read and Write) Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 128. Timing Requirements for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
PDSto PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PDSHold (high to invalid)  
PRWN to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PRWN Hold (high to invalid)  
0
ns  
t41  
t42  
0
4
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t43  
0
t44  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
PB Write to PCSN Setup (valid to high)  
PCSN to PB Write Hold (high to invalid)  
4
t45*  
t46*  
t47*  
t48*  
t51*  
t52*  
0
6
0
10  
4
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PDS signal. An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last.  
For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PDS going low, if PDS goes low  
after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first. All requirements referenced to  
PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or complete a transaction.  
PDS is programmable to be active-high or active-low. It is shown active-low in Figures 49 and 50. POBE and PIBF may be programmed to  
be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram. t53 and t54 apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
Table 129. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
t49*  
t50*  
t154  
8
ns  
*
This timing diagram for the PHIF port shows accesses using the PCSN signal to initiate and complete a transaction. The transactions can  
also be initiated and completed with the PDS signal. An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last.  
For example, the timing requirements referenced to PCSN going low, t45 and t49, should be referenced to PDS going low, if PDS goes low  
after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first. All requirements referenced to  
PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or complete a transaction.  
112  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
16-bit READ  
16-bit WRITE  
8-bit READ  
8-bit WRITE  
t55  
t55  
V
IH  
PCSN  
V
IL  
t56  
t56  
t55  
t56  
V
IH  
PDS  
V
IL  
t56  
t55  
V
IH  
PRWN  
V
IL  
t56  
V
OH  
PBSEL  
POBE  
PIBF  
V
OL–  
t53  
t53  
V
OH  
V
OL  
t54  
t54  
V
OH  
V
OL  
5-4039 (F).a  
Figure 50. PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (Pulse Period and Flags) Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 130. Timing Characteristics for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
PCSN/PDSto POBE(high to high)  
PCSN/PDSto PIBF(high to high)  
Min  
Max  
17  
Unit  
ns  
t53*  
t54*  
17  
ns  
*
An input/output transaction is initiated by PCSN or PDS going low, whichever comes last. For example, t53 and t54 should be referenced  
to PDS going low, if PDS goes low after PCSN. An input/output transaction is completed by PCSN or PDS going high, whichever comes first.  
All requirements referenced to PCSN should be referenced to PDS, if PDS is the controlling signal. PRWN should never be used to initiate or  
complete a transaction.  
PDS is programmable to be active-high or active-low. It is shown active-low in Figures 49 and 50. POBE and PIBF may be programmed to  
be the opposite logic levels shown in the diagram. t53 and t54 apply to the inverted levels as well as those shown.  
Table 131. Timing Requirements for PHIF Motorola Mode Signaling (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
20  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t55  
t56  
PCSN/PDS/PRWN Pulse Width (high to low)  
PCSN/PDS/PRWN Pulse Width (low to high)  
20  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
113  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
V
IH  
IL  
PCSN  
V
V
IH  
IL  
PODS (PDS*)  
V
V
IH  
IL  
PIDS (PRWN*)  
PBSEL  
V
t47  
t45  
t48  
t46  
V
IH  
IL  
V
V
IH  
IL  
PSTAT  
PB[7:0]  
V
t50  
t154  
t49  
V
OH  
OL  
V
5-4040 (F).a  
*
Motorola mode signal name.  
Figure 51. PHIF Intel or Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 132. Timing Requirements for Intel and Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) (2.7 V Oper-  
ation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
4
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t45†  
t46‡  
t47†  
t48‡  
PSTAT to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PSTAT Hold (high to invalid)  
PBSEL to PCSN Setup (valid to low)  
PCSN to PBSEL Hold (high to invalid)  
0
ns  
6
ns  
0
ns  
t45, t47, and t49 are referenced to the falling edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs last.  
t46, t48, and t50 are referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs first.  
Table 133. Timing Characteristics for Intel and Motorola Mode Signaling (Status Register Read) (2.7 V Op-  
eration)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Max  
12  
Unit  
ns  
t49†  
t50‡  
PCSN to PB Read (low to valid)  
PCSN to PB Read Hold (high to invalid)  
PCSN to PB Read 3-state (high to 3-state)  
ns  
t154  
8
ns  
t45, t47, and t49 are referenced to the falling edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs last.  
t46, t48, and t50 are referenced to the rising edge of PCSN or PODS(PDS), whichever occurs first.  
114  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
VIH–  
RSTB  
VIL–  
t57  
VOH–  
POBE  
VOL–  
t58  
VOH–  
PIBF  
VOL–  
5-4775 (F)  
Figure 52. PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Reset Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 134. PHIF Timing Characteristics for PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Reset (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
3
Max  
25  
Unit  
t57  
t58  
RSTB Disable to POBE/PIBF* (high to valid)  
RSTB Enable to POBE/PIBF* (low to invalid)  
ns  
ns  
25  
*
After reset, POBE and PIBF always go to the levels shown, indicating output buffer empty and input buffer empty. The DSP program, however,  
may later invert the definition of the logic levels for POBE and PIBF. t57 and t58 continue to apply.  
VIH–  
CKO  
VIL–  
t59  
VOH–  
VOL–  
POBE  
t59  
VOH–  
VOL–  
PIBF  
5-4776 (F)  
POBE and PIBF can be programmed to be active-high or active-low. They are shown active-high. The timing characteristic for active-low is  
the same as for active-high.  
Figure 53. PHIF, PIBF, and POBE Disable Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 135. PHIF Timing Characteristics for POBE and PIBF Disable (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
t59  
CKO to POBE/PIBF Disable (high/low to disable)  
20  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
115  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.9 Serial I/O Specifications (2.7 V Operation)  
t70  
t72  
t75  
t71  
t74  
VIH–  
VIL–  
ICK  
t73  
t75  
VIH–  
VIL–  
ILD  
DI  
t77  
t78  
VIH–  
VIL–  
B0  
B1  
BN – 1*  
t79  
B0  
VOH–  
VOL–  
IBF  
5-4777 (F)  
*
N = 16 bits or 8 bits.  
Figure 54. SIO Passive Mode Input Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 136. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Clock Period (high to high)†  
Clock Low Time (low to high)  
Clock High Time (high to low)  
Load High Setup (high to high)  
Load Low Setup (low to high)  
Load High Hold (high to invalid)  
Data Setup (valid to high)  
Min  
40  
18  
18  
8
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t70  
t71  
t72  
t73  
t74  
t75  
t77  
t78  
8
0
7
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
0
For multiprocessor mode, see note in Section 11.10, Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation).  
Device is fully static; t70 is tested at 200 ns.  
Table 137. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
35  
Unit  
t79  
IBF Delay (high to high)  
ns  
116  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
ICK  
VOL–  
t101  
t76a  
VOH–  
ILD  
VOL–  
*
t77  
t78  
VIH–  
VIL–  
DI  
B0  
B1  
BN – 1  
t79  
B0  
VOH–  
VOL–  
IBF  
5-4778 (F)  
*
ILD goes high during bit 6 (of 0:15), N = 8 or 16.  
Figure 55. SIO Active Mode Input Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 138. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Data Setup (valid to high)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Min  
7
Max  
Unit  
t77  
t78  
ns  
ns  
0
Table 139. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
ILD Delay (high to low)  
Min  
3
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t76a  
t101  
t79  
35  
35  
ILD Hold (high to invalid)  
IBF Delay (high to high)  
ns  
ns  
Agere Systems Inc.  
117  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
t80  
t82  
t85  
t81  
t84  
VIH–  
VIL–  
OCK  
t83  
t85  
VIH–  
VIL–  
OLD  
DO*  
t88  
t94  
t87  
B0  
t90  
B1  
t90  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
B7  
BN – 1  
AS7  
t89  
t95  
t92  
AD0  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SADD  
DOEN  
OBE  
AD7  
AD1  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t96  
VOH–  
VOL–  
5-4796 (F)  
*
See sioc register, MSB field, to determine if B0 is the MSB or LSB. See sioc register, ILEN field, to determine if the DO word length is 8 bits  
or 16 bits.  
Figure 56. SIO Passive Mode Output Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 140. Timing Requirements for Serial Inputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Clock Period (high to high)†  
Min  
40  
18  
18  
8
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t80  
t81  
t82  
t83  
t84  
t85  
Clock Low Time (low to high)  
Clock High Time (high to low)  
Load High Setup (high to high)  
Load Low Setup (low to high)  
Load Hold (high to invalid)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
8
ns  
0
ns  
For multiprocessor mode, see note in Section 11.10, Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation).  
Device is fully static; t80 is tested at 200 ns.  
Table 141. Timing Characteristics for Serial Outputs (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Data Delay (high to valid)  
Min  
3
Max  
35  
35  
35  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t87  
t88  
t89  
t90  
t92  
t93  
t94  
t95  
t96  
Enable Data Delay (low to active)  
Disable Data Delay (high to 3-state)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Address Delay (high to valid)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Enable Delay (low to active)  
Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
OBE Delay (high to high)  
3
35  
35  
35  
35  
118  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
OCK  
VOL–  
t102  
t86a  
VOH–  
OLD  
*
VOL–  
t88  
t94  
t87  
B0  
t90  
B1  
t90  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
DO  
B7  
BN – 1  
AS7  
t89  
t95  
t92  
AD0  
t93  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SADD  
DOEN  
OBE  
AD7  
AD1  
VIH–  
VIL–  
t96  
VOH–  
VOL–  
5-4797 (F)  
*
OLD goes high at the end of bit 6 of 0:15.  
Figure 57. SIO Active Mode Output Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 142. Timing Characteristics for Serial Output (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Min  
3
Max  
35  
Unit  
t86a  
t102  
t87  
t88  
t89  
t90  
t92  
t93  
t94  
t95  
t96  
OLD Delay (high to low)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
OLD Hold (high to invalid)  
Data Delay (high to valid)  
3
35  
35  
35  
Enable Data Delay (low to active)  
Disable Data Delay (high to 3-state)  
Data Hold (high to invalid)  
Address Delay (high to valid)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Enable Delay (low to active)  
Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
OBE Delay (high to high)  
3
35  
35  
35  
35  
Agere Systems Inc.  
119  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
VOH–  
CKO  
VOL–  
t97  
t99  
t98  
VOH–  
VOL–  
ICK  
t100  
VOH–  
VOL–  
OCK  
VOH–  
ICK/OCK*  
t76a  
t101  
t76b  
t101  
VOH–  
VOL–  
ILD  
t86a  
t102  
t86b  
t102  
VOH–  
VOL–  
OLD  
t104  
t105  
t103  
t105  
VOH–  
VOL–  
SYNC  
5-4798 (F)  
*
See sioc register, LD field.  
Figure 58. Serial I/O Active Mode Clock Timing (2.7 V Operation)  
Table 143. Timing Characteristics for Signal Generation (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
ICK Delay (high to high)  
ICK Delay (high to low)  
OCK Delay (high to high)  
OCK Delay (high to low)  
ILD Delay (high to low)  
ILD Delay (high to high)  
ILD Hold (high to invalid)  
OLD Delay (high to low)  
OLD Delay (high to high)  
OLD Hold (high to invalid)  
SYNC Delay (high to low)  
SYNC Delay (high to high)  
SYNC Hold (high to invalid)  
Min  
3
Max  
18  
18  
18  
18  
35  
35  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t97  
t98  
t99  
t100  
t76a  
t76b  
t101  
t86a  
t86b  
t102  
t103  
t104  
t105  
3
35  
35  
3
35  
35  
120  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
11 Timing Characteristics for 2.7 V Operation (continued)  
11.10 Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation)  
TIME SLOT 1  
TIME SLOT 2  
OCK/ICK  
t113  
t112  
t112  
t113  
VIH–  
VIL–  
SYNC  
*
t116  
B1  
t117  
VOH–  
VOL–  
B15  
B0  
B7  
B8  
B15  
AS7  
B0  
DO/D1  
SADD  
t114  
t122  
t120  
t121  
AD0 AD1  
t115  
AD7 AS0  
AD0  
t120  
VOH–  
VOL–  
DOEN  
5-4799 (F)  
*
Negative edge initiates time slot 0.  
Figure 59. SIO Multiprocessor Timing Diagram (2.7 V Operation)  
Note: All serial I/O timing requirements and characteristics still apply, but the minimum clock period in passive  
multiprocessor mode, assuming 50% duty cycle, is calculated as (t77 + t116) x 2.  
Table 144. Timing Requirements for SIO Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference  
Parameter  
Sync Setup (high/low to high)  
Sync Hold (high to high/low)  
Address Setup (valid to high)  
Address Hold (high to invalid)  
Min  
35  
0
Max  
Unit  
ns  
t112  
t113  
t114  
t115  
ns  
12  
0
ns  
ns  
Table 145. Timing Characteristics for SIO Multiprocessor Communication (2.7 V Operation)  
Abbreviated Reference†  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
35  
Unit  
ns  
t116  
t117  
t120  
t121  
t122  
Data Delay (bit 0 only) (low to valid)  
Data Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
DOEN Valid Delay (high to valid)  
Address Delay (bit 0 only) (low to valid)  
Address Disable Delay (high to 3-state)  
30  
ns  
25  
ns  
35  
ns  
30  
ns  
With capacitance load on ICK, OCK, DO, SYNC, and SADD = 100 pF, add 4 ns to t116—t122.  
Agere Systems Inc.  
121  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
12 Outline Diagrams  
12.1 100-Pin BQFP (Bumpered Quad Flat Pack)  
All dimensions are in millimeters.  
22.860 ± 0.305  
22.350 ± 0.255  
19.050 ± 0.405  
13  
1
89  
14  
88  
PIN #1  
IDENTIFIER  
ZONE  
EDGE CHAMFER  
22.350  
± 0.255  
19.050  
± 0.405  
22.860  
± 0.305  
38  
64  
39  
63  
DETAIL A  
DETAIL B  
4.570 MAX  
3.555  
± 0.255  
SEATING PLANE  
0.10  
0.760 ± 0.255  
0.635 TYP  
0.255  
0.175 ± 0.025  
GAGE PLANE  
SEATING PLANE  
0.280 ± 0.075  
0.91/1.17  
M
0.150  
DETAIL B  
DETAIL A  
5-1970 (F)r.10  
122  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
12 Outline Diagrams (continued)  
12.2 100-Pin TQFP (Thin Quad Flat Pack)  
All dimensions are in millimeters.  
16.00 ± 0.20  
14.00 ± 0.20  
PIN #1 IDENTIFIER ZONE  
100  
76  
1
75  
14.00  
± 0.20  
16.00  
± 0.20  
25  
51  
26  
50  
DETAIL A  
DETAIL B  
1.40 ± 0.05  
1.60 MAX  
SEATING PLANE  
0.08  
0.05/0.15  
0.50 TYP  
1.00 REF  
0.106/0.200  
0.25  
GAGE PLANE  
SEATING PLANE  
0.19/0.27  
0.45/0.75  
M
0.08  
DETAIL B  
DETAIL A  
5-2146 (F)r.14  
Agere Systems Inc.  
123  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
12 Outline Diagrams (continued)  
12.3 144-Pin PBGA (Plastic Ball Grid Array)  
All dimensions are in millimeters.  
13.00 ± 0.20  
+ 0.70  
– 0.00  
11.50  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
+ 0.70  
– 0.00  
11.50  
13.00  
± 0.20  
MOLD  
COMPOUND  
PWB  
0.80 ± 0.05  
0.36 ± 0.04  
1.56 + 0.19  
– 0.21  
SEATING PLANE  
0.20  
SOLDER BALL  
0.40 ± 0.10  
11 SPACES @ 1.00 = 11.00  
M
L
K
J
0.50 ± 0.10  
H
G
F
11 SPACES @  
1.00 = 11.00  
E
D
C
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
5-5205 (F)  
124  
Agere Systems Inc.  
Data Sheet  
January 2002  
DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor  
Notes  
Agere Systems Inc.  
125  
Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc.  
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corp.  
IEEE is a registered trademark of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.  
For additional information, contact your Agere Systems Account Manager or the following:  
INTERNET:  
E-MAIL:  
http://www.agere.com  
docmaster@agere.com  
N. AMERICA: Agere Systems Inc., 555 Union Boulevard, Room 30L-15P-BA, Allentown, PA 18109-3286  
1-800-372-2447, FAX 610-712-4106 (In CANADA: 1-800-553-2448, FAX 610-712-4106)  
ASIA:  
Agere Systems Hong Kong Ltd., Suites 3201 & 3210-12, 32/F, Tower 2, The Gateway, Harbour City, Kowloon  
Tel. (852) 3129-2000, FAX (852) 3129-2020  
CHINA: (86) 21-5047-1212 (Shanghai), (86) 10-6522-5566 (Beijing), (86) 755-695-7224 (Shenzhen)  
JAPAN: (81) 3-5421-1600 (Tokyo), KOREA: (82) 2-767-1850 (Seoul), SINGAPORE: (65) 778-8833, TAIWAN: (886) 2-2725-5858 (Taipei)  
Tel. (44) 7000 624624, FAX (44) 1344 488 045  
EUROPE:  
Agere Systems Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the product(s) or information contained herein without notice. No liability is assumed as a result of their use or application.  
Copyright © 2002 Agere Systems Inc.  
All Rights Reserved  
January 2002  
DS02-060AUTO  

相关型号:

DSP1629T16K10IT

16-Bit Digital Signal Processor
ETC

DSP1629T16K12.5IR

DSP|16-BIT|CMOS|QFP|100PIN|PLASTIC
ETC

DSP1629T16K16.7IT

16-Bit Digital Signal Processor
ETC

DSP1629T16K19.2IR

DSP|16-BIT|CMOS|QFP|100PIN|PLASTIC
ETC

DSP16410

DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor
AGERE

DSP16410C

DSP1629 Digital Signal Processor
AGERE

DSP16410CG

DSP16410CG Digital Signal Processor
AGERE

DSP16411

DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
AGERE

DSP1643

Telecommunication IC
ETC

DSP1648C

Host-Based Controller V.92 Modem Chip Set
AGERE

DSP16A-F14-033

16-Bit Digital Signal Processor
ETC

DSP16A-F14-033I

16-Bit Digital Signal Processor
ETC